10CAG/10CHG/10CG-2.4GHz

10-CHANNEL RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq

Entire Contents ©Copyright 2009 1M23N21007
2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ........................................................... 3

Additional Technical Help, Support and Service ........ 3

$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ ........................ 4

Meaning of Special Markings ..................................... 5

Safety Precautions (do not operate without reading) .. 5 

Introduction to the 10CG ............................................ 7

&RQWHQWVDQG7HFKQLFDO6SHFL¿FDWLRQV........................ 9

Accessories ............................................................... 10

Transmitter Controls & 

6ZLWFK,GHQWL¿FDWLRQ$VVLJQPHQWV............................. 11

Charging the Ni-Cd Batteries ................................... 15

Stick Adjustments ..................................................... 16

Adjusting display contrast ........................................ 16

Changing mode.......................................................... 17

Power Down mode .................................................... 17

CAMPacLQLWLDOL]LQJDQGGDWDFRQYHUVLRQ&&6WR&* .... 17

Radio Installation & Range Checking ...................... 18

Transmitter Displays and Buttons ............................. 23

Warning and Error Displays ..................................... 24

AIRPLANE (ACRO) FUNCTIONS ................................ 25

Map of Functions........................................................ 26

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane ...... 27

ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................................ 30

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY, NAME .......... 30 

PARAMETER Submenu: RESET, TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AILE-2, THRREV, CONTRAST, BACK-LIGHT, HOME-DISP, USER NAME ........ 33

LOGIC SW ..................................................................... 38

Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38

END POINT .................................................................. 39

Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT .............. 40

'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDOD/R, EXP) .......... 42

TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45

Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUX-CH) . 46

TRAINER ..................................................................... 47

TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48

SERVO Display ........................................................... 49

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) ......................... 50

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ........................... 51

Wing types ................................................................ 51

FLAPERON ................................................................... 52

FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53

Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF) ................................. 54

Using Twin Aileron Servos: AILE-2 ........................... 55

ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56

Tail types ................................................................... 56

ELEVON ....................................................................... 56

Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR) ............................ 57

V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58

SNAP ROLL .................................................................. 59

0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61

ELEV-FLAP.................................................................... 62

AIRBRAKEBUTTERFLY (crow) ..................................... 63

THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65

THROTTLE DELAY ......................................................... 66

THROTTLE CURVE ........................................................ 67

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-4 ............................................. 68

Curve, Prog. mixes 5-8 ............................................. 71

GYA gyro mixing (GYRO SENSE) ............................... 73

Other Equipment ....................................................... 74

GLIDER (GLID(1A+1F)(2A+1F)(2A+2F)) FUNCTIONS . 75 

Table of contents........................................................ 75 

Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider ................ 76 

GLIDER-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ........ 78 

Model type (PARAMETER submenu) ........................... 78

MOTOR CUT ................................................................ 79 

GLIDER-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ..... 80 

AILE/RUDD .................................................................. 81

AILE-FLAP (GLID(2A+2F) only) .................................... 82

SPOILER MIX ............................................................... 83

OFFSETs$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV...................... 84

START DELAY (GLID(1A+1F) only) ................................. 85 

CAMBER MIX ............................................................... 85

CAMBER FLAP .............................................................. 86

BUTTERFLY................................................................... 87 

Channel 3’s function selection (CONDITION/FUNCTION) 88 

HELICOPTER FUNCTIONS.......................................... 89

Table of contents and reference info for helicopters . 89

Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter ................... 90

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................ 93

MODEL TYPE (PARAMETERS submenu) ........................ 93

SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel

correction) (not in H-1) .............................................. 95

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition ................... 97

THR-CUTVSHFLDOL]HGVHWWLQJVIRUKHOLFRSWHUVSHFL¿F

models) ..................................................................... 98

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ........... 99

THROTTLE HOLD .......................................................... 99

THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE and REVO ............................. 100

Idle-ups ................................................................... 101

7ULPVRIIVHW............................................................. 102

Delay ....................................................................... 103

Hovering setups ...................................................... 104

+LJKORZSLWFK ........................................................ 105

Gyros and governors ............................................... 106

THROTTLE MIX ............................................................ 96

SWASH RING .............................................................. 96

Glossary ........................................................................ 110

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this 

point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name 

or abbreviation, as seen on the screen of the 10C, that 

name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on 

the radio’s screen, including capitalization and shown in 

a DIFFERENT TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention 

a specific control on the radio itself, such as moving 

SWITCH A, KNOB VR(B), or the THROTTLE STICK,

those words will be displayed as they are here.
3

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a Futaba®

 FASST-2.4GHz* &* VHULHV GLJLWDO SURSRUWLRQDO5& V\VWHP7KLV V\VWHPLV

extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system 

DQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\,I\RXKDYHDQ\GLI¿FXOWLHVZKLOHXVLQJ\RXUV\VWHPSOHDVHFRQVXOWWKH

manual, our online Frequently Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba 

Service Center. 

*FASST: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology

Owner’s Manual and Additional Technical Help 

This manual has been carefully written to be as helpful to you, the new owner, as possible. There are many pages of 

setup procedures and examples. However, it need not be your sole resource of setup guidelines for your 10CG. For 

example, pages 27-29 include setup instructions for a basic 4-channel airplane. The Frequently Asked Questions web page 

referenced below includes this type of step-by-step setup instructions for a variety of other model types, including multiengine, complex gear installation, 7-servo aerobatic models, 140 degree CCPM, etc. 

KWWSZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT

Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without 

notice.

Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “off 

season” to ensure safe operation. 

IN NORTH AMERICA 

Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be sure to 

UHJXODUO\YLVLWWKH&*)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVZHE VLWHDWZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT7KLVSDJHLQFOXGHVH[WHQVLYH

programming, use, set up and safety information on the 10CG radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical 

XSGDWHVDQG86PDQXDOFRUUHFWLRQVZLOOEHDYDLODEOHRQWKLVZHESDJH,I\RXGRQRW¿QGWKHDQVZHUVWR\RXUTXHVWLRQV

there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient 

response.

Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public 

UHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHD IDEXORXV UHIHUHQFH IRUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQEHSULQWHGDQGVDYHG IRU

future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the 

internet for information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time 

to assist you. 

FOR SERVICE ONLY: 

Futaba Service Center 

3002 N. Apollo Drive, Suite 1

Champaign, IL 61822

Phone: 217-398-0007

ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPVHUYLFHKWPO

Email: service@futaba-rc.com

FOR SUPPORT : 

(PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS) 

Please start here for answers to most questions:

ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT

FACSIMILE: 217-398-7721

PHONE: 217-398-8970 option 2

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA 

Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service 

needs.

Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems sold in North 

America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for assistance. 
4

$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ

1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use. It is not intended for use in any application

other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry 

RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVDQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWRVXFKSXUSRVHV

2. Exportation precautions: 

(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing 

the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other 

countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may 

be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba 

distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met. 

(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, and an 

application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment other than 

radio controlled models. 

0RGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWV)XWDEDLVQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUXQDXWKRUL]HGPRGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQW

and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty. 

Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)

7KLVGHYLFHWUDGHQDPH)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQRI$PHULFDPRGHOQXPEHU5+65+6FRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

The responsible party of this device compliance is:

Futaba Service Center

3002 N Apollo Drive Suite 1, Champaign, IL 61822 U.S.A.

TEL (217)398-8970 or E-mail: support@futaba-rc.com (Support)

TEL (217)398-0007 or E-mail: service@futaba-rc.com (Service) 

The RBRC. SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba 

Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect and recycle these 

batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC. 

program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or 

municipal waste system, which is illegal in some areas. 

 (for USA) 

You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call 

1-800-8BATTERY for information on Ni-Cd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of America’s involvement 

in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources. 

*RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.
5

Meaning of Special Markings 

Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks: 

DANGER3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQVDQGFDXVHGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\LIQRWFDUULHGRXW

properly. 

WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if 

QRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\RUSURFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSUREDELOLW\RIVXSHU¿FLDOLQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLVKLJK

CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, 

or physical damage, if not carried out properly. 

 = Prohibited = Mandatory 

Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children. 

FLYING SAFETY 

WARNING

To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions: 

Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 10CG protects the model memories with non-volatile 

EEPROM memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, the transmitter still should 

have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system to the Futaba Service Center 

DQQXDOO\GXULQJ\RXUQRQÀ\LQJVHDVRQIRUDFRPSOHWHFKHFNXSDQGVHUYLFH

NiCd Battery 

Charge the batteries! (See Charging the NiCd batteries, p. 15, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter and 

UHFHLYHUEDWWHULHV IRUDWOHDVWKRXUVEHIRUHHDFKÀ\LQJVHVVLRQ$ORZEDWWHU\ZLOOVRRQGLHSRWHQWLDOO\FDXVLQJ

ORVVRIFRQWURODQGDFUDVK:KHQ\RXEHJLQ\RXUÀ\LQJVHVVLRQUHVHW\RXU&*¶VEXLOWLQWLPHUDQGGXULQJWKH

session pay attention to the duration of usage. 

Stop flying long before your batteries become low on charge. Do not rely on your radio’s low battery 

warning systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always check your transmitter 

DQGUHFHLYHUEDWWHULHVSULRUWRHDFKÀLJKW

Where to Fly 

:HUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXÀ\DWDUHFRJQL]HGPRGHODLUSODQHÀ\LQJ¿HOG<RXFDQ¿QGPRGHOFOXEVDQG¿HOGVE\DVNLQJ

your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics. 

You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 chartered clubs 

across the country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. 

Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below. 

Academy of Model Aeronautics 

5161 East Memorial Drive

Muncie, IN 47302

Tele. (800) 435-9262

Fax (765) 289-4248

or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

 $OZD\VSD\SDUWLFXODUDWWHQWLRQWRWKHÀ\LQJ¿HOG¶VUXOHV as well as the presence and location of spectators, the 

ZLQGGLUHFWLRQDQGDQ\REVWDFOHVRQWKH¿HOG%HYHU\FDUHIXOÀ\LQJLQDUHDVQHDUSRZHUOLQHVWDOOEXLOGLQJVRU

communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their vicinity. 

,I\RXPXVWÀ\DZD\IURPDFOXE¿HOGEHVXUHWKHUHDUHQRRWKHUPRGHOHUVÀ\LQJZLWKLQDWKUHHWR¿YHPLOHUDQJH, or 

you may lose control of your aircraft or cause someone else to lose control. 
6

$WWKHÀ\LQJ¿HOG

To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and off in the proper sequence: 

3XOOWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\RXUPRWRUHQJLQH

2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen. 

&RQ¿UPWKHSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG

4. Turn on your receiver power. 

7HVWDOOFRQWUROV,IDVHUYRRSHUDWHVDEQRUPDOO\GRQ¶WDWWHPSWWRÀ\XQWLO\RXGHWHUPLQHWKHFDXVHRIWKHSUREOHP

7HVWWRHQVXUHWKDWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJVDUHFRUUHFWDIWHUDGMXVWLQJWKHQWXUQLQJWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIDQGFRQ¿UPLQJWKH

SURSHUVXUIDFHWKURWWOHPRYHPHQWV7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUEDFNRQ

6. Start your engine. 

7. Complete a full range check (see p. 22).

$IWHUÀ\LQJEULQJ\RXUWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQHQJDJHDQ\NLOOVZLWFKHVRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\RXUPRWRUHQJLQH

9. Turn off receiver power. 

10. Turn off transmitter power. 

,I\RXGRQRWWXUQRQ\RXUV\VWHPLQWKLVRUGHU\RXPD\GDPDJH\RXUVHUYRVRUFRQWUROVXUIDFHVÀRRG\RXUHQJLQHRU

in the case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe 

injury. 

 :KLOH\RXDUHJHWWLQJUHDG\WRÀ\LI\RXSODFH\RXUWUDQVPLWWHURQWKHJURXQGEHVXUHWKDWWKHZLQGZRQ
W

tip it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing the engine to speed up. 

Also, damage to your transmitter may occur. 

In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that it remains visible at all times. Flying 

behind large objects such as buildings, grain bins, etc. is not suggested. Doing so may result in the reduction of the 

quality of the radio frequency link to the model.

'RQRWJUDVSWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQDGXULQJÀLJKW Doing so may degrade the quality of the radio frequency 

transmission.

As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides of the 

WUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXUÀ\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHV

this situation, easily move the antenna to correct this situation.

 'RQ¶W À\LQ WKH UDLQ Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and 

FDXVHHUUDWLFRSHUDWLRQRUORVVRIFRQWURO ,I\RXPXVWÀ\LQZHWZHDWKHUGXULQJDFRQWHVWEHVXUHWRFRYHU\RXU

WUDQVPLWWHUZLWKDSODVWLFEDJRUZDWHUSURRIEDUULHU1HYHUÀ\LIOLJKWQLQJLVH[SHFWHG
7

A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO THE 10CG SYSTEM 

TRANSMITTER:

• Large graphic liquid-crystal display panel with two buttons, a cursor lever and an easy set up turn-and-press dial for 

quick, easy setup. 

• All transmitters include all three aircraft types with specialized programming for each, including: 

• Airplane (ACRO)

 • V-TAIL • Twin Aileron Servos (FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF) • Gyro Mixing 

 • ELEVON • Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR)

 • AIRBRAKE • Snap Roll (4 separate directions available) 

• Helicopter (8 swashplate types, including CCPM, see page 93)(HELI)

 • 3 Idle Ups • Throttle and Pitch Curves per Condition 

 • Revo. Mixing • Gyro Mixing including Separate Settings per Condition 

 • Delay • Governor Mixing 

 6DLOSODQH*OLGHUZLQJW\SHVGLID 1AIL+1FLP2AIL+1FLP2AIL+2FLP)

 • V-TAIL • Twin Ailerons (FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF )OLJKW&RQGLWLRQV1RUPDO6WDUW

 • ELEVON • Crow (BUTTERFLY     6SHHG'LVWDQFH/DQGLQJ

 • OFFSET (5 conditions)

• BASIC menu for quick, easy set up of less complex models. 

• ADVANCE menu for more complex, unique setups. 

• Four electronic TRIM LEVERS for rapid yet precise trim adjustment - no remembering to “store trims” between models 

and no more “bumped trims” during transport. 

• IDLE- DOWN (ACRO), THR-CUT (ACROHELI) (engine shut off), and MOTOR CUT (GLIDVHWXSVWRDOORZSUHFLVHHQJLQHPRWRU

control for taxi and landings. 

• 15 complete model memories with 33 more per optional CAMPac(128K).

• New stick design with improved feel, adjustable length and tension. 

• Triple rates available by setting dual rates to 3-position switches. 

• Eight SWITCHES, three DIALS and two SLIDERS; completely assignable in most applications. 

• Trainer system includes the “functional” (FUNC) setting, which allows the student to use the 10CG’s mixing, helicopter, 

and other programming functions even with a 4-channel buddy box. (Optional trainer cord required.)

• 10CG transmitter transmits in both 2.4G-7CH and 2.4G-10CH by selecting modulation and then cycling the transmitter 

power. Requires receiver of proper modulation. 

• Permanent memory storage via EEPROM with no backup battery to service or have fail. 

• 10CAG transmitter features airplane friendly switch layout, with the trainer switch at the left hand (Mode 2), and a 

notched throttle to minimize throttle changes with rudder input. Defaults to ACRO model type. 

• 10CHG transmitter features helicopter-friendly switch layout, with idle-up and throttle hold switches at the left hand, and 

a smooth, ratchet-less (unsprung) throttle for perfect hovering. Defaults to HELI(H-1 swashplate type) model type. 

• Change transmitter mode from mode 2 to modes 1, 3, or 4. (See P. 17) 

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or 

abbreviation as seen on the screen of the 10CG, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s 

screen, including capitalization and shown in a DIFFERENT TYPE STYLEIRUFODULW\$Q\WLPHZHPHQWLRQDVSHFL¿FFRQWURO

on the radio itself, such as moving SWITCH A, KNOB VR(B), or the THROTTLE STICK, those words will be displayed 

as they are here. 
8

RECEIVER: R6014HS/R6008HS

• These models have two (2) operation modes as shown below.

Normal mode/High Speed mode

The "Normal mode" accepts any type of servos or the peripherals as the frame rate of the output is 14ms. The "High

Speed mode" only accept the digital servos for outputs from 1ch to 6ch, including BLS series, and most peripheral

equipments such as the gyros or brushless ESCs. The frame rate of the outputs is 7ms. 

The outputs for other channels indicated below allow to use any type of servos as the frame rate of these outputs are still

14ms on the High Speed mode.

R6008HS - 7ch and 8ch

R6014HS - 7ch to 12ch, DG1, DG2

R6014HS

R6008HS

• Futaba FASST-2.4G R6014HS,R6014FS, R6008HS or R608FS receiver may be used with the 10CG at 2.4G-10ch mode.

Futaba FASST-2.4G R607FS, R617FS, R616FFM or R6004FF receiver may be used with the 10CG at 2.4G-7ch mode.

T10CG 2.4G system and receiver

compatibility Transmitter

Receiver

R606FS R6004FF, R616FFM,

R607FS, R617FS

R608FS, R6008HS,

R6014FS, R6014HS

T10CG 2.4G System

10ch mode — — Okay

7ch mode Okay Okay —

SERVOS

3OHDVHVHHWHFKQLFDOVSHFL¿FDWLRQVSDJHIRUVSHFL¿FVRQWKHVHUYRV

7KHLQFOXGHGUHFHLYHULVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKDOO-SOXJ)XWDEDVHUYRVLQFOXGLQJUHWUDFWZLQFKDQGGLJLWDOVHUYRV
9

CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH

Your 10CAG, 10CHG or 10CG system includes the following components: 

• T10CAG, T10CHG or T10CG Transmitter 

• R6008HS or R6014HS Receiver 

• N55%&+*RQO\RU15-&$*RQO\1L&GEDWWHU\

& Charger

• Switch harness 

• Aileron extension cord

• Neck strap

* The set contents depend on the type of set.

Transmitter T10CAG/HG/G 

(2-stick, 10-channel, FASST-2.4G system) 

Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band

Modulation: 2.4G-7ch or 2.4G-10ch, switchable 

Power supply: 9.6V NT8S700B Ni-Cd battery 

Receiver R6008HS/R6014HS

(Dual antenna diversity)

Power requirement: 4.8V or 6.0V battery or regulated 

output from ESC, etc. (*1)

6L]H5+6[[LQ[[PP

R6014HS: 2.06 x 1.48 x 0.63 in. (52.3 x 37.5 x 16.0 mm)

:HLJKW5+6R]J5+6R]J

(*1) Be sure that when using ESC's regulated output the 

capacity of the ESC must meet your usage condition.

Usage condition on "High Speed mode" 

(R6008HS/R6014HS)

 CAUTION

 When using the R6008HS/R6014HS in the high 

speed (HS) mode, digital servos are required for 

WKH¿UVWVL[FKDQQHOV

,IDQDQDORJVHUYRLVFRQQHFWHGWRRQHRIWKH¿UVWVL[

channels when in the high speed mode, the servo 

will not function properly. Additionally, while many 

peripheral devices will operate in either the high 

speed or normal mode, some will not. If there are 

any difficulties noted, please return the reciver's 

operational mode to the "Normal" mode to determine 

LIWKLVUHVROYHVWKHGLI¿FXOW\

If using the R6008HS in the high speed mode, analog 

servos may be used for channels seven and eight. If 

using the R6014HS in the high speed mode, analog 

servos may be used for channels seven to 12 and for 

DG1 and DG2.

(For Operation Mode Selection, see p.20)

(Suggested Servo for use with your 10CG system)

Servo S9252 (Digital servo) 

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver)

Output torque: 91.7 oz.-in. (6.6 kg-cm) at 4.8V

2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9

Size: 1.57 x 0.79 x 1.44 in. (40 x 20 x 36.6 mm)

Weight: 1.76 oz. (50 g)

Servo S9255 (Digital servo) 

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver)

Output torque: 125.0 oz.-in. (9.0 kg-cm) at 4.8V

2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9

Size: 1.57 x 0.79 x 1.44 in. (40 x 20 x 36.6 mm)

Weight: 1.94 oz. (55 g)

Servo S3151 (Standard, Digital servo) 

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver)

Output torque: 43.1 oz.-in. (3.1 kg-cm) at 4.8V

2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9

Size: 1.59 x 0.79 x 1.42 in. (40.5 x 20 x 36.1 mm)

Weight: 1.48 oz. (42 g)

Servo S3001 (Standard, ball-bearing) 

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 41.7 oz.-in. (3.0 kg-cm)

2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHF

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 in. (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.59 oz. (45.1g)
10

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information: 

• CAMPac Memory module - the optional DP-128K CAMPac increases your model storage capability (to 48 models 

IURPDQGDOORZV\RXWRWUDQVIHUSURJUDPVWRDQRWKHU&*&WUDQVPLWWHU1RWHWKDWGDWDFDQQRWEHWUDQVIHUUHGWR

from any other model of transmitter (i.e. 8U, 9Z, etc). 

However, CAMPac ZKLFK VDYHGWKH GDWD RI7&7&6WUDQVPLWWHULV FRQYHUWLEOH IRUWKH GDWD RIWKLV &*&

transmitter. See p.17 for the conversion method. 

Insertion of a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type (ex: 9Z) will result in a complete 

CAMPac data reset and loss of all data. 

• NT8S Transmitter battery pack - the (700mAh) transmitter Ni-Cd battery pack may be easily exchanged with a fresh one 

WRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV

7UDLQHUFRUGWKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQHUFRUGPD\EHXVHGWRKHOSDEHJLQQLQJSLORWOHDUQWRÀ\HDVLO\E\SODFLQJWKHLQVWUXFWRU

on a separate transmitter. Note that the 10CG transmitter may be connected to another 10CG system, as well as to many 

other models of Futaba transmitters. The 10CG transmitter uses the newer micro plug (rectangular type) cord plug. Both 

new-to-new and new-to-round plug style trainer cords are available. 

1HFNVWUDSDQHFNVWUDSPD\EHFRQQHFWHGWR\RXU7&*V\VWHPWRPDNHLWHDVLHUWRKDQGOHDQGLPSURYH\RXUÀ\LQJ

precision, since your hands won’t need to support the transmitter’s weight. 

• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-duty version with 

heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations. 

FHOO9UHFHLYHUEDWWHU\SDFNV$OO)XWDEDDLUERUQHHTXLSPHQWH[FHSWWKDWZKLFKLVVSHFL¿FDOO\ODEHOHGRWKHUZLVH

is designed to work with 4.8V (Ni-Cd 4 cells) or 6.0V (Ni-Cd 5 cells or alkaline 4 cells). Using a 6.0V pack increases the 

FXUUHQWÀRZWRWKHVHUYRVZKLFKDFFHOHUDWHVWKHLUUDWHRIUHVSRQVHDQGWKHLUWRUTXH+RZHYHUEHFDXVHRIWKLVIDVWHUFXUUHQW

GUDZDFHOOEDWWHU\SDFNRIWKHVDPHP$KUDWLQJZLOOODVWDSSUR[LPDWHO\WKHWLPHRIDFHOOSDFN

• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros are available for your aircraft or helicopter needs. See p.73 for aircraft or p. 

107 for helicopter gyro information. 

• Governor (GV1) - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head speed 

regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc. See p. 108 for details. 

• Receivers - various models of receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (See p. 8.) 
11

7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD&$*0RGHV\VWHPDVVXSSOLHGE\WKHIDFWRU\

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C

to create triple rates. See p. 42 for details.)

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

** RF LED is blue when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly.

CAMPac or Dust Cap

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - AIRPLANE

SW(B)

VR(A)

VR(B)

SW(A)

SW(F)

SW(E)

VR(D)

VR(E)

VR(C)

SW(G)

SW(H)

SW(D)

SW(C)

CH8 Knob

This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing 

is activated controls the flap.

Flap Trim Control

Rudder Dual Rate Switch / CH9

Elevator Dual Rate

Snap Roll or 

 Trainer Switch

Landing Gear

Switch

/CH5

Rudder

/Throttle

Stick

Power

LED*

Throttle

Trim Lever

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

MODE Key

END Key

Cursor Lever

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Elevator - Flap Mixing or 

Airbrake Mixing Switch

Spoiler/CH7 Control

This knob is disabled if aileron differential

is activated.

Carrying Handle

Antenna

LED**

RF

Switch / CH10
12

7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD&+*0RGHV\VWHPDVVXSSOLHGE\WKHIDFWRU\

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C

to create triple rates. See p. 42 for details.)

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

** RF LED is blue when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly.

CAMPac or Dust Cap

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - HELI

SW(B)

VR(A)

VR(B)

SW(A)

SW(F)

SW(E)

VR(D) VR(E)

VR(C)

SW(G)

SW(H)

SW(D)

SW(C)

CH8 Knob

Hovering - Pitch Knob

Rudder Dual Rate Switch/CH9

Elevator Dual Rate

Switch/CH10

 Idle-up 3 Switch

 Idle-up 1&2

Switch

Throttle/Collective

Pitch & Rudder Stick

Throttle/Collective

Trim Lever

Power

LED*

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Throttle - Hold Switch

Trainer Switch

Governor Switch

Hovering - Throttle Knob/CH7

Carrying Handle

LED**

RF

Antenna

MODE Key

END Key

Cursor Lever

High-pitch Lever
13

NOTE: If you need to remove or replace 

the transmitter battery, do not pull on its 

wires to remove it. Instead, gently pull on the 

FRQQHFWRU
V SODVWLF KRXVLQJ ZKHUHLW SOXJVLQWR

the transmitter.

Battery connector location

Charging jack

Trainer function

connector

Battery cover

NT8S

Ni-Cd battery 

pack

SWITCH ASSIGNMENT TABLE 

• The factory default functions activated by the switches and knobs for a 10CAG Mode 2 transmitter are shown below. 

• Most 10CG functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily. 

• Basic control assignments of channels 5-10 are quickly adjustable in AUX-CH (see p. 46). For example, the channel 5 

servo, which defaults to SWITCH E for retract use, can easily be unassigned (NULL) to allow for easy use as a second 

rudder servo in a mix, or to a slider or dial for bomb door or other control. 

• Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate. 

• 10CAG Mode 1, 10CHG, and 10CG transmitter functions are similar but reverse certain switch commands. Always 

check that you have the desired switch assignment for each function during set up. 

Switch/Knob

A or H

Airplane (ACRO) Sailplane/Glider (GLID) Helicopter (HELI)

SWITCH A elevator dual rate

ch10

elevator dual rate 

GRZQ EXWWHUÀ\RQ

ch10

elevator dual rate 

ch10

SWITCH B rudder dual rate

ch9

rudder dual rate

ch9

rudder dual rate

ch9

SWITCH C up = ELE-FLP on 

FHQWHUGRZQ  IDLE-DOWN

down = AIRBRAKE on

up = ELE-FLP on

center = Distance cond.

down = Landing cond.

governor

SWITCH D aileron dual rate aileron dual rate aileron dual rate

SWITCH E or G* ODQGLQJJHDUFK WKURWWOHKROGFK

SWITCH F or H* VQDSUROOWUDLQHU trainer WUDLQHUTHR-CUT

SWITCH G or E* none up = Speed cond.

down = Start cond.

idle-up 1 and 2

SWITCH H or F* none LGOHXSJ\UR

KNOB A ÀDSFK

ÀDSWULPLIFLAPERON on)

ÀDS

ch6

HOVERING PITCH

KNOB B ch 8 ch 8 ch 8

KNOB C VSRLOHUFK

(disabled if AIL-DIFF on)

ch 7

(disabled if AIL-DIF on)

HOVERING THROTTLE

ch7

SLIDER D none ch 5 none

SLIDER E none none HI-PIT

*On the 10CAG Mode 2 transmitters, the TOP LEFT SWITCHES are spring-loaded and 2-position; on the 10CAG Mode 1, 10CHG, and 10CG, 

those switches are on the right side. For consistency, the switch position’s designation remains the same (upper left is F, etc), but the functions are 

moved to match the switch type.
14

RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS

Receiver

Output and

Channel

Aircraft (ACRO)

1 DLOHURQVDLOHURQ1

FRPELQHGÀDS	DLOHURQ2

2 elevator

3 throttle

4 rudder

5 VSDUHODQGLQJJHDUDLOHURQ1,3FRPELQHGÀDSDQGDLOHURQ2,3

6 VSDUHÀDSVFRPELQHGÀDSDQGDLOHURQ2

7 VSDUHDLOHURQ1

8 VSDUHHOHYDWRU4PL[WXUHFRQWURO

9 spare

10 spare 1 Aileron Differential mode (AILE-DIFF). (See p. 54). 2 Flaperon mode. (See p. 52).

3 Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6. ( AILE-2) (See 

p. 55)

4

AILEVATOR (dual elevator) mode. (See p. 57).

Receiver

Output and

Channel

Sailplane/Glider (GLID)

GLID (1A+1F) GLID (2A+1F)

(AILE-DIFF)

GLID (2A+2F)

ELEVON FLAPERON (AILE-DIFF)

1 combined elevator-2 & 

aileron-1

c o m b i n e d f l a p - 2 & 

aileron-1

aileron-1 aileron-1

2 combined elevator-1 & 

aileron-2

H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-2 & elevator-12

H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-2 & elevator-12

H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-2 & elevator-12

3 VSDUHPRWRU VSDUHPRWRUFRPELQHG

ÀDS	DLOHURQ3

VSDUHPRWRU VSDUHPRWRUVSRLOHU1

4 rudder U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-1 & elevator-22

U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-1 & elevator-22

U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G

rudder-1 & elevator-22

5 VSDUHVSRLOHU1 VSDUHVSRLOHU1FRPELQHG

ÀDS	DLOHURQ3

VSDUHVSRLOHU1 ÀDS

6 ÀDSV c o m b i n e d f l a p - 1 & 

aileron-2

ÀDSV ÀDS

7 spare spare aileron-2 aileron-2

8 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU1

9 spare spare spare spare

10 spare spare spare spare 1 2-servo spoiler mode (SPOILER). (See p. 83). 2 V-tail mixing mode. (See p. 58).

3 Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6 

and channels 3 and 6. ( AILE-2) (See p. 55)

ACRO

(FLAPERON)

AIL12

FLP22

(CH1)

AIL22

FLP12

(CH6)

AIL

(CH1)

AIL11

(CH1) FLP

(CH6)

ACRO

(w/FLAP)

AIL21

(CH7)

(Wing Type)

(V-TAIL)

ELE1

RUD2

(CH2)

ELE2

RUD1

(CH4)

(NORMAL)

ELE

(CH2)

(AILVATOR)

ELE1

AIL3

(CH2)

ELE2

AIL4

(CH8)

(Tail Type)

AIL1

ELE2

(CH1)

GLID(1A+1F)

(ELEVON)

AIL2

ELE1

(CH2)

GLID(1A+1F)

(FLAPERON)

AIL1

FLP2

(CH1)

AIL2

FLP1

(CH6)

AIL1

(CH1)

FLP1

(CH6)

FLP2

(CH5)

AIL2

(CH7)

GLID(2A+2F)

AIL1

(CH1)

AIL2

(CH7) FLP

(CH6)

GLID(2A+1F)

(Wing Type)

(V-TAIL)

ELE1

RUD2

(CH2)

ELE2

RUD1

(CH4)

(NORMAL)

ELE

(CH2)

(Tail Type)
15

The initial charge, and any charge after a complete discharge, should 

be at least 18 hours to ensure full charge. The batteries should be left 

RQ FKDUJH IRU DERXW  KRXUV ZKHQ UHFKDUJLQJWKH VWDQGDUG 15-

NR4F1500 and NT8S700B Ni-Cd batteries. 

We recommend charging the batteries with the charger supplied 

with your system. Note that the use of a fast charger may damage the 

batteries by overheating and dramatically reduce their lifetime. 

You should fully discharge your system’s NiCd batteries periodically to prevent a condition called 

"memory".

)RUH[DPSOHLI\RXRQO\PDNHWZRÀLJKWVHDFKVHVVLRQRU\RXUHJXODUO\XVHRQO\DVPDOODPRXQWRIWKHEDWWHULHV

capacity, the memory effect can reduce the actual capacity even if the battery is fully charged. You can cycle your 

batteries with a commercial cycling unit*, or by leaving the system on and exercising the servos by moving the 

transmitter sticks until the transmitter shuts itself off. Cycling should be done every four to eight weeks, even 

during the winter or periods of long storage. Keep track of the batteries capacity during cycling; if there is a 

noticeable change, you may need to replace the batteries. 

*Note that the 10CG transmitter system has electronic protection from overcharging and reverse polarity via a poli-switch. It does NOT have a 

GLRGHLQWKHFKDUJHFLUFXLWDQGPD\EHGLVFKDUJHGSHDNFKDUJHGZLWKWKHEDWWHU\LQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU

DO NOT attempt to charge your 8-cell transmitter pack on the 4-cell receiver plug of the wall charger! 

CHARGING THE NiCd BATTERIES 

Charging Your System’s Batteries 

1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and airborne NiCd batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors of the 

charger. 

2. Plug the charger into a wall socket. 

3. Check that the charger LED lights. 

Receiver

Output and

Channel

Helicopter (HELI)

1 aileron (cyclic roll)

2 elevator (cyclic pitch)

3 throttle

4 rudder

5 VSDUHJ\UR

6 pitch (collective pitch)

7 VSDUHJRYHUQRU

8 VSDUHPL[WXUHFRQWURO

9 spare

10 spare

(Swash Type)

H-1 H-3 HR3

ELE ELE

ELE1

ELE2

120 ̊

120 ̊ 120 ̊

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

HN3

120 ̊

120 ̊

120 ̊

ELE

PIT

AIL

HE3

ELE

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

PIT

(AIL) AIL(PIT)

H-2

PIT

FRONT

AIL

H-4

ELE1

ELE2 AIL

PIT

H4X

(Normal linkage type)

H-1:each servo linked 

to the swashplate 

independently.

Charger

TX: Transmitter charging indicator

RX: Receiver charging indicator

To transmitter charging jack

Receiver Ni-Cd battery
16

Adjusting the length of the non-slip control sticks 

<RXPD\DGMXVWWKHWHQVLRQRI\RXUVWLFNVWRSURYLGHWKHIHHOWKDW\RXSUHIHUIRUÀ\LQJ7RDGMXVW\RXUVSULQJV\RX¶OOKDYH

to remove the rear case of the transmitter. First, remove the battery cover on the rear of the transmitter. Next, unplug the 

battery wire, and remove the battery from the transmitter. Next, using a screwdriver, remove the four screws that hold the 

transmitter’s rear cover in position, and put them in a safe place. Gently ease off the transmitter’s rear cover. Now you’ll 

VHHWKHYLHZVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDERYH

Using a small Phillips screwdriver, rotate the adjusting screw for each stick for the desired spring tension. The tension 

increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise. 

:KHQ\RXDUHVDWLV¿HGZLWKWKHVSULQJWHQVLRQVUHDWWDFKWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
VUHDUFRYHU:KHQWKHFRYHULVSURSHUO\LQSODFH

reinstall and tighten the four screws. Reinstall the battery and cover. 

Adjusting Display Contrast: 

To adjust the display contrast, from the home menu press and hold the END BUTTON.

Turn the DIAL while still holding the END BUTTON:

clockwise to brighten 

counterclockwise to darken the display 

Let go off the DIAL and the END BUTTON.

You may change the length of the control sticks to make your transmitter more 

comfortable to hold and operate. To lengthen or shorten your transmitter’s 

VWLFNV¿UVWXQORFNWKHVWLFNWLSE\KROGLQJORFNLQJSLHFH%DQGWXUQLQJVWLFNWLS

A counterclockwise. Next, move the locking piece B up or down (to lengthen 

or shorten). When the length feels comfortable, lock the position by turning 

locking piece B counterclockwise. 

Stick tip A Locking piece B

Stick lever tension adjustment 

Mode 2 transmitter with rear cover removed.

Aileron

Elevator

Stick Stick Rudder
17

Changing Modes (TX SETTING):

Hold down MODE and END keys while turning on the transmitter to enter the TX SETTING

menu.

Stick Mode: The screen reads "STK-MODE". Use the DIAL to change this to the correct mode. 

Note that this will NOT change the throttle and elevator rachets, etc. Those are mechanical 

changes that must be done by a service center.

Throttle Reverse: THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim 

functionality to the stick’s upper half. To use THR-REV, CURSOR DOWN to THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV. Turn the 

transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the radio. (GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each 

model can be set. (See p.33)

Display language: can be selected the display language of the function name, etc. in each function menu. The screen reads 

"LANGUAGE". Change this to the desired language.

Area Selection (Frequency Range):

The T10CG transmitter has been designed to function in many countries. If you will be utilizing this transmitter in a 

country other than France, please make sure that TM10-MODE is set to "GENERAL". If, however, this transmitter will be 

utilized in France, it must be set to "FRANCE".

Power Down mode (TM10 POWER MODE):

We have installed a special "Power Down Mode" for doing a ground range check. Hold down 

DIAL while turning on the transmitter to call TM10 POWER MODE menu. 

Power Down Mode: To activate the "Power Down Mode" press DIAL and the home screen will appear. During this mode, 

the RF power is reduced so the range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode is activated the blue LED on the 

front of the transmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warning with a beep sound every 3 seconds. 

The "Power Down Mode" continues for 90 seconds and after that the power will return to the normal level. To exit the 

"Power Down Mode" before the 90 seconds, press DIAL again. This mode is available one time only so if you need to reuse this function the transmitter power must be cycled and the "Power Down Mode" reset. NEVERVWDUWÀ\LQJZKHQWKH

"Power Down Mode" is active.

Power Off Mode: To use the RF power off mode, CURSOR DOWN to OFF and press DIAL. During this mode, the RF 

power is turned off. The blue LED on the front of the transmitter is turned off.

CAMPac Initializing Method and Data Conversion (T9C/T9CS to T10CG): 

Insertion of a new CAMPac or a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type will 

open EXT-MEMORY menu after turning the transmitter on.

To initialize the CAMPac, CURSOR DOWN to "Yes" and press DIAL and the check display of "OK?" will appear. Press 

DIAL again, the initializing of the CAMPac will start.

7RFRQYHUWWKH&$03DFGDWDIURP7&7&6WR7&*VHOHFWWR1RE\CURSOR lever and then press DIAL and the 

home screen will appear. See p.30 for the conversion method.
18

RADIO INSTALLATION 

Follow these guidelines to properly mount the servos, receiver and battery. 

• Make certain the alignment tab on the battery, switch and servo connectors is oriented correctly and “keys” into the 

corresponding notch in the receiver or connectors before plugging them in. When unplugging connectors, never pull on 

the wires. Always pull on the plastic connector instead. 

• If your aileron servo (or others) are too far away to plug into the receiver, use an aileron extension cord to extend the 

length of the servo lead. Additional Futaba extension cords of varying lengths are available from your hobby dealer. 

Always use an extension of the proper length. Avoid plugging multiple extensions together to attain your desired length. 

If distance is greater than 18” or multiple or high current draw servos are being used, use Futaba Heavy-Duty servo 

extensions.

Servo

Rubber

grommet Servo

Rubber

grommet

• Always mount the servos with the supplied rubber grommets. Do not over 

tighten the screws. No part of the servo casing should contact the mounting 

UDLOVVHUYRWUD\RUDQ\RWKHUSDUWRIWKHDLUSODQHKHOLFRSWHUVWUXFWXUH2WKHUZLVH

YLEUDWLRQZLOOEHWUDQVPLWWHGWRWKHVHUYRFDXVLQJSUHPDWXUHZHDUDQGRUVHUYR

failure.

• Note the small numbers (1, 2, 3, 4) molded into each arm on the Futaba 4-arm servo arms. The numbers 

indicate how many degrees each arm is “off” from 90 degrees to correct for minute manufacturing 

deviations from servo to servo. 

• To center the servos, connect them to the receiver and turn on the transmitter 

and receiver. Center the trims on the transmitter, then find the arm that will be 

perpendicular to the pushrod when placed on the servo. 

• After the servos are installed, operate each servo over its full travel and check that the pushrods and servo arms do not 

bind or contact each other. Also make sure the controls do not require excess force to operate. If there is an objectionable 

buzzing sound coming from a servo, there is probably too much resistance in the control. Find and correct the problem. 

Even if there is no servo damage, excess battery drain will result. 

• Use the mounting plateIURPWKHUHFHLYHURQRIIVZLWFKDVDWHPSODWHIRUWKHFXWRXWDQGVFUHZKROHV0RXQWWKHVZLWFK

on the side of the fuselage opposite the engine exhaust, and where it won’t be inadvertently turned on or off during 

handling or storage. Be certain the switch moves without restriction and “snaps” from ON to OFF, and that the cutout 

allows full motion of the switch in both directions. 

• When you install the switch harness to the helicopter, please use the switch cover. Generally sandwich the frame between 

the switch and switch cover and securely tighten the screws. Different models might require different installations. If so, 

please follow the model's instruction manual. 

Fasten about 5-10cm 

from the servo outlet 

so that the lead wire 

is neat.

Slack in the lead wire.

• To prevent the servo lead wires from being broken by vibration during 

ÀLJKWSURYLGHDVOLJKWDPRXQWRIVODFNRUH[WUDVRWKDWWKHZLUHVWLFNVRXW

slightly and fasten it at suitable points. In addition, periodically check the 

wire during daily maintenance.
19

IMPORTANT: Since the 2.4GHz have different characteristics than that of the conventional 27MHz and 72MHz 

frequencies, please read this section carefully to maximize your enjoyment of the 2.4GHz system. 

5HFHLYHU
V$QWHQQD,QVWDOODWLRQ

Antenna

*Must be kept as straight as possible.

Coaxial cable

R6014HS Receiver

<RXZLOOQRWHWKDWWKH5+65+6GLIIHUVLQDSSHDUDQFH

from the standard Futaba receiver. These receivers incorporate 

two separate antennas into their design which enables them 

to receive the radio frequency transmission at two different 

locations.

Futaba's dual antenna diversity then seamlessly selects the best 

signal reception between these antennas to ensure that there is no loss of signal. 

• To obtain the best results of the diversity function, please refer to the following instructions: 

1. The two antennas must be kept as straight as possible. Otherwise it will reduce 

the effective range. 

2. The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other. 

 7KLVLVQRWDFULWLFDO¿JXUHEXWWKHPRVWLPSRUWDQWWKLQJLVWRNHHSWKHDQWHQQDV

away from each other as much as possible. 

Larger models can have large metal objects that can attenuate the RF signal.In 

this case the antennas should be placed at both sides of the model. Then the best 

5)VLJQDOFRQGLWLRQLVREWDLQHGDWDQ\À\LQJDWWLWXGH

3. The antennas must be kept away from conductive materials, such as metal, 

carbon and fuel tank by at least a half inch. The coaxial part of the antennas does not need to follow these guidelines, but 

do not bend it in a tight radius. 

4. Keep the antennas away from the motor, ESC, and other noise sources as much as possible. 

Antenna Antenna

*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other. 

*The main purpose of the photo demonstrates how the antenna should be placed. 

5HFHLYHU9LEUDWLRQDQG:DWHUSURR¿QJ7KHUHFHLYHUFRQWDLQVSUHFLVLRQHOHFWURQLFSDUWV%HVXUHWRDYRLGYLEUDWLRQVKRFN

and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials.

It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with 

a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may 

experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service.
20

Operation Mode Select (R6008HS/R6014HS):

R6014HS

R6008HS

LED Link/Mode

Switch

LED

Link/Mode

Switch

The operation mode is on "Normal mode" from factory shipping. To change the mode, please adhere to the following

steps:

0 to 1 sec. More than 1 sec.

0 sec. 1 sec.

Press and Hold time

Turn on the receiver.

No function

Showing the CURRENT 

mode with blink.

Red Blink = Normal

Green/Red Blink = 

High Speed

Solid as the mode changed.

Red Solid = Normal

Green/Red Solid = High 

Speed

(Become Red after one (1) 

second)

㧔Function㧕 To change the mode between 

Normal and High Speed

㧔LED Status㧕

1. Turn off the receiver.

2. Press and hold the Link/Mode switch and turn on the receiver. 

Keep holding the switch for more than one(1) second. The LED

EHJLQVÀDVKLQJWRLQGLFDWHWKHFXUUHQWVWDWXV

3. Release the switch.

4. Turn off the receiver.

By doing so, the receiver will change modes. 

Please check the operation mode by observing the LED when turning on the receiver. If possible ensure that there's no

FASST transmitter in operation near the receiver.

When the receiver is turned on:

•Red when on "Normal mode"

•Green and Red (makes Orange) when on "High Speed mode". (After two(2) seconds, change to Red.)

If there are some FASST transmitters turned on near the receiver, the LED may show the above status for a brief moment 

before changing to the status indication as shown in the "LED indication" table above.
21

7UDQVPLWWHU
V$QWHQQD

1. As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is 

from the sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should not be pointed 

GLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXUÀ\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWLRQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQD

to correct this situation.

3OHDVHGRQRWJUDVSWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQDGXULQJÀLJKW'RLQJVRPD\GHJUDGHWKH

quality of the RF transmission to the model. 

WARNING

After the linking is done, please cycle receiver power and check if the receiver to be linked is really under the 

control by the transmitter to be linked.

Do not perform the linking procedure with motor's main wire connected or with the engine operating as it may 

result in serious injury.

Link Procedure (T10CG transmitter/R6008HS or R6014HS receiver):

Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receiver must be linked with 

the ID code of the transmitter with which it is being paired. Once the link is made, the ID code is stored in the receiver and 

no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used with another transmitter. When you purchase additional 

5+65+6UHFHLYHUVWKLVSURFHGXUHLVQHFHVVDU\RWKHUZLVHWKHUHFHLYHUZLOOQRWZRUN

0 to 2 sec. More than 2 sec.

0 sec. 2 sec.

Press and Hold time

(Function) No function Re-link(ID set)

1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close to each other within one (1) meter. 

2. Turn on the transmitter. 

3. Check the LED that is placed on the front side of the transmitter to see if the 

RF signal is active. When the blue LED is ON solid, the RF signal is being sent. 

4. Turn on the receiver. 

5. Press down the Link/Mode switch for more than two seconds, and release the switch. The receiver begins the linking 

operation.

:KHQWKHOLQNLQJLVFRPSOHWHWKH/('LQWKHUHFHLYHUZLOOFKDQJHWRVROLGJUHHQ3OHDVHFRQ¿UPWKDWWKHVHUYRVDUHQRZ

operational from your transmitter. Please refer to the table below for the LED status of the receiver's condition. 

 LED Indication (R6008HS/R6014HS)

No signal reception Red : On 

Receiving signals Green: On 

Receiving signals, but ID is unmatched. Green: Blink 

Unrecoverable failure (EEPROM, etc.) Red and Green turn on alternately.
22

Range Testing Your R/C System 

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to ensure that 

HYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQMR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJ7KH7&*WUDQVPLWWHU

incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.

Power Down mode (TM10 POWER MODE): 

We have installed a special "Power Down Mode" for doing a ground range check. To access 

the "Power Down Mode" hold down the DIAL while turning on the transmitter. Doing so will 

bring up TM10 POWER MODE menu. 

To activate the "Power Down Mode" press DIAL and the home screen will appear. During this mode, the RF power is 

reduced so the range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode is activated the blue LED on the front of the 

transmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warning with a beeping sound every 3 seconds. 

The "Power Down Mode" continues for 90 seconds and after that the power will go back to the normal level. To exit the 

"Power Down Mode" before the 90 seconds, press DIAL again. This mode is available 1 time only so if you need to re-use 

WKLVIXQFWLRQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUPXVWEHF\FOHG1(9(5VWDUWÀ\LQJZKHQWKH3RZHU'RZQ0RGHLVDFWLYH

1. With the "Power Down Mode" on, walk away from the model while simultaneously operating the controls. Have an 

DVVLVWDQWVWDQGE\WKHPRGHOWRFRQ¿UPWKDWDOOFRQWUROVDUHFRPSOHWHO\DQGFRUUHFWO\RSHUDWLRQDO<RXVKRXOGEHDEOHWR

walk approximately 30-50 paces from the model without losing control. 

2. If everything operates correctly, return to the model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible, location so it will be

within reach after starting the engine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in the low throttle position, then start the 

engine or motor. Perform another range check with your assistant holding the aircraft with the engine running at various 

VSHHGV,IWKHVHUYRVMLWWHURUPRYHLQDGYHUWHQWO\WKHUHPD\EHDSUREOHP:HZRXOGVWURQJO\VXJJHVW\RXGRQRWÀ\XQWLO

WKHVRXUFHRIWKHGLI¿FXOW\KDVEHHQGHWHUPLQHG/RRNIRUORRVHVHUYRFRQQHFWLRQVRUELQGLQJSXVKURGV$OVREHFHUWDLQ

that the battery has been fully charged.
23

TRANSMITTER DISPLAYS & BUTTONS

:KHQ\RX¿UVWWXUQRQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUDFRQ¿UPDWLRQGRXEOHEHHSVRXQGVDQGWKHVFUHHQVKRZQEHORZDSSHDUV%HIRUH

À\LQJRUHYHQVWDUWLQJWKHHQJLQHEHVXUHWKDWWKHPRGHOW\SHDQGQDPHDSSHDULQJRQWKHGLVSOD\PDWFKHVWKHPRGHOWKDW

\RXDUHDERXWWRÀ\,I\RXDUHLQWKHZURQJPRGHOPHPRU\VHUYRVPD\ EHUHYHUVHGDQGWUDYHOVDQGWULPVZLOO EHZURQJ

potentially leading to a crash. 

(GLWEXWWRQVDQG6WDUWXS6FUHHQDSSHDUVZKHQV\VWHPLV¿UVWWXUQHGRQ

MODE BUTTON: (key)

Press and hold MODE BUTTON for one second to open programming menus. Press MODE BUTTON to switch 

between BASIC and ADVANCE menus. HELI only: Press MODE BUTTON to scroll between conditions in certain

functions.

END BUTTON: (key)

Press END BUTTON to return to previous screen. Closes functions back to menus, closes menus to start-up screen.

CURSOR LEVER:

Control CURSOR LEVER WR VFUROO XSVFUROO GRZQVFUROO OHIWVFUROO ULJKW DQG VHOHFWWKH RSWLRQWR HGLW ZLWKLQ D

function.

Press CURSOR LEVERWRSDJHXSSDJHGRZQZLWKLQBASIC or ADVANCE menu or a function.

Turn DIAL:

Turn DIAL clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through choices within an option of a function. For example, to 

VHOHFWZKLFKVZLWFKFRQWUROVGXDOWULSOHUDWHV

Press DIAL:

Press DIAL to select the actual function you wish to edit from the menu.

Press DIAL DQGKROGRQHVHFRQGWRFRQ¿UPPDMRUGHFLVLRQVVXFKDVWKHGHFLVLRQWRVHOHFWDGLIIHUHQWPRGHOIURP

memory, copy one model memory over another, trim reset, store channel position in FailSafe, change model type, 

reset entire model. An on screen inquiry will ask if you are sure. 

Press DIAL again to accept the change.

PUSH

Rudder trim

display

Aileron trim

display

Elevator trim

display

2.4G-7CH/10CH:

Modulation indicator

128: CAMPac display (10CG/10C data)

9C: CAMPac display (9C/9CS data)

Battery

voltage

Timers

Throttle trim

display

Model number

and name

Dial

CURSOR lever

END

button

MODE

button

Total timer display <TIMER>

Shows the cumulated ON time. (hours:minutes)

Up/down timer display <ST1.ST2>

(minutes:seconds)

Model timer display <MDL>

Shows the cumulated ON time for each model.(hours:minutes)

MIX: Mixer Alert

Resetting timers:

Select the desired timer with CURSOR lever. The timer 

display flashes. To reset the timer, press Dial for one second.
24

WARNING & ERROR DISPLAYS 

An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for a number of reasons, including when the 

transmitter power switch is turned on, when the battery voltage is low, and several others. Each display has a unique sound

associated with it, as described below.

MODEL SELECTION ERROR: Warning sound: 5 beeps (repeated 3 times)

The MODEL SELECTION warning is displayed when the transmitter attempts to load a model memory from a memory

module (optional CAMPac) that is not currently plugged into the transmitter. When this occurs, model No. 01 is 

automatically loaded.

'RQRWÀ\XQWLO WKHSURSHUPRGHOLVORDGHGLQWRPHPRU\ Reinsert the memory module, 

and recall the desired setup using the model select function. 

LOW BATTERY ERROR: Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off.

The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 8.5V.

Land your model as soon as possible before loss of control due to a dead battery. 

MIXER ALERT WARNING: Warning sound: 5 Beeps (repeated until problem resolved or overridden) 

The MIXER ALERT warning is displayed to alert you whenever you turn on the transmitter with 

any of the mixing switches active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch or 

control is deactivated. Switches for which warnings will be issued at power-up are listed 

below:

ACRO:Throttle cut, idle-down, snap roll, airbrake GLID%XWWHUÀ\FRQGLWLRQVHELI:Throttle cut, throttle hold, idle-up

If turning a switch OFF does not stop the mixing warning: When the warning does not stop even when the mixing switch

indicated by the warning display on the screen is turned off, the functions described previously probably use the same

switch and the OFF direction setting is reversed. In short, one of the mixings described above is not in the OFF state. 

In this case, reset the warning display by pressing CURSOR LEVER. Next, change one of the switch settings of the 

duplicated mixings.

BACKUP ERROR: Warning sound: 4 beeps (repeated continuously)

The BACKUP ERROR warning occurs when the transmitter memory is lost for any reason. If this occurs, all of the data will 

be reset when the power is turned on again.

[Note] At this warning display, the transmitter transmits in 2.4G-10CH mode even if the set-up mode is 2.4G-7CH mode.

Do not fly when this message is displayed: all programming has been erased and is not 

available. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service. 

MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE DISPLAY

This warning appears when an (optional) CAMPacPHPRU\PRGXOHLVXVHGLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUIRUWKH¿UVWWLPH:KHQWKH

MODE BUTTON is pressed, initialization of the module begins, after which the memory module can be used. Once the 

module is initialized, the display will not appear again. 

The 10C CANNOT convert data from other radio types (i.e. 8U, 9Z). Installation of a CAMPac with data from another 

radio type will result in reinitialization of the CAMPac and loss of all data. 

RF ERROR: Warning sound: A single long beep.

ÀDVKLQJ

The single beep lets you know that the RF output has stopped for any reason. The blue RF 

light also goes out. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service.
25

AIRCRAFT (ACRO) MENU FUNCTIONS 

Please note that all BASIC menu functions are the same for airplanes (ACRO), sailplanes (GLID), and helicopters (HELI). The 

glider BASIC menu includes MOTOR CUT that is discussed in the Glider section and does not include IDLE-DOWN or THRCUT; the helicopter BASICPHQXLQFOXGHVDGGLWLRQDOIHDWXUHVVZDVKSODWHDGMXVWPHQWDQGWKURWWOHSLWFKFXUYHVDQGUHYRIRU

1RUPDOÀLJKWPRGHWKDWDUHGLVFXVVHGLQWKH+HOLFRSWHUVHFWLRQ

AIRPLANE (ACRO) FUNCTIONS ................................ 25

Map of Functions........................................................ 26

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane ...... 27

ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................................ 30

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY, NAME .......... 30 

PARAMETER Submenu: RESET, TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AILE-2,

CONTRAST, BACK-LIGHT, HOME-DISP, USER NAME, LOGIC 

SW ............................................................................. 33

Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38

END POINT .................................................................. 39

Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT .............. 40

'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDOD/R, EXP) .......... 42

TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45

Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH) ............................................................................. 46

TRAINER ..................................................................... 47

TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48

SERVO Display ........................................................... 49

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) ......................... 50

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ........................... 51

Wing types ................................................................ 51

FLAPERON ................................................................... 52

FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53

Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF) ................................. 54

Using a 5-channel receiver: AILE-2 ............................ 55

ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56

Tail types ................................................................... 56

ELEVON ....................................................................... 56

Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR) ............................ 57

V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58

SNAP ROLL .................................................................. 59

0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61

ELEV-FLAP.................................................................... 62

AIRBRAKEBUTTERFLY (crow) ..................................... 63

THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65

THROTTLE DELAY ......................................................... 66

THROTTLE CURVE ........................................................ 67

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-4 ............................................. 68

Curve, Prog. mixes 5-8 ............................................. 71

GYA gyro mixing (GYRO SENSE) ............................... 73
26

MAP OF ACRO BASIC FUNCTIONS 

ACRO Basic Menu

( for one second)

(Startup screen)

(Basic Menu 1/2)

To return to the Startup screen, 

press the End key.

(Basic Menu 2/2)

To enter the Basic Menu, 

press the Mode key for one second.

Press Mode key to toggle back and forth 

between BASIC and ADVANCE menus.

Press Cursor lever to page up and down through the 2 pages of screens 

in each menu. Note that all functions which have more than one page have 

a <1/2> indicator in the upper right hand corner to indicate page 1 of 2 or 

page 2 of 2.

Use Cursor lever to highlight function in Menu screen. 

Then press the Dial to choose that function.

Mode Select

End Selection

Cursor Lever

(Down/Up/Left/Right)

Dial Right or Left

Press Dial

Switch Up

Switch at Center

Switch Down

Stick Up

Stick Right

Stick Down

Turn Knob Right Stick Left

Dial Left Turn Knob Left

Dial Right

Press Cursor Lever

C
27

A QUICK GUIDE: GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL AIRCRAFT

This guide is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to 

give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more than you may have already considered. It follows our basic 

format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we accomplish; a “by name” description of what we're 

doing to help acquaint you with the radio; then a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery when setting up your 

model.

For additional details on each function, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the 

goals column as a convenience to you. 

See p.26 for a legend of symbols used. 

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receivers, etc. per your model's instructions. Turn 

on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered. 

Mechanically adjust all linkages as close as possible to proper control throws. 

Check servo direction. Make notes now of what you will need to change during 

programming.

Name the model. 

P. 32.

[Note that you do not need to do 

anything to "save” or store this data. 

Only critical changes such as a MODEL

RESET require additional keystrokes to 

accept the change.]

Open the BASIC menu, then open the 

MODEL submenu.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

Go to MODEL NAME. C to NAME.

(First character of model's name is 

highlighted.)

Input aircraft's name. 

Close the MODEL submenu.

WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU

When proper character is displayed,

C to move to next character.

Repeat as needed.

to return to BASIC menu.

Reverse servos as needed for proper 

control operation. 

P. 38.

In the BASIC menu, open (servo) 

REVERSE.

C to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its 

direction of travel. (Ex: reversing rudder 

servo.)

C to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Repeat as needed. 

Adjust Travels as needed to match 

model's recommended throws (usually 

listed as high rates). 

P. 39.

From BASIC menu, choose END POINT. C to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

Adjust the servo's end points. 

(Ex: throttle servo) 

Close the function.

C to THROTTLE.

THROTTLE STICK.

until carb barrel closes as desired.

THROTTLE STICK.

until throttle arm just opens carb 

fully at full THROTTLE STICK.

Repeat for each channel as needed.
28

With digital trims you don’t shut the engine off with THROTTLE TRIM. Let's set up IDLE-DOWN and "throttle cut" (THR-CUT)

now. 

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

Set up IDLE-DOWN.

P. 40. 

IDLE-DOWN slows the engine's idle for 

landings, sitting on the runway, and 

maneuvers such as spins. The normal 

(higher idle) setting (when IDLE-DOWN is 

off) is for engine starting, taxi, and most 

ÀLJKWPDQHXYHUVWRPLQLPL]HFKDQFHRI

DÀDPHRXW

From the BASIC menu, choose IDLEDOWN.

C to IDLE-DOWN.

to choose IDLE-DOWN.

Activate and adjust IDLE-DOWN. C to MIX. to OFF.

C to center position. Screen now 

reads ON.

C to RATE.

to increase rate until engine idles 

reliably but low enough to sit still.

Optional: change switch command from 

C center-and-down to any other switch.

(Not needed in this example.)

Close the Function.

THR-CUT shuts the engine off completely 

ZLWKWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFK

P. 41. 

(NOTE: DO NOT assign IDLE-DOWN and 

THR-CUT to both positions of a 2position 

switch. See IDLE-DOWN for details.)

From the BASIC menu, choose THR-CUT. C to THR-CUT.

to choose THR-CUT.

Activate, assign SWITCH and adjust. 

Close the function.

C to MIX. to OFF.

C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to DOWN.

C to RATE. C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

u n t i l t h r o t t l e b a r r e l c l o s e s 

completely.

6HW XS GXDOWULSOH UDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO

(D/R,EXP).

P. 42.

(Note that in the middle of the left 

side of the screen is the name of the 

channel AND the switch position you 

are adjusting. Two or even THREE 

rates may be set per channel by simply 

choosing the desired switch and 

programming percentages with the 

switch in each of its 2 or 3 positions.)

From the BASIC menu, choose D/R,EXP. C to D/R,EXP.

to choose D/R,EXP.

Choose the desired control, and set 

the first (Ex: high) rate throws and 

exponential.

A to up position.

C to CH:.

to choose CH>2 (elevator).

[note the screen reads ELEV (UP)]

C to D/R.

ELEVATOR STICK.

to set desired “UP” percentage.

ELEVATOR STICK.

as needed to adjust “DOWN” 

percentage (normally set the same as down.)

C to EXP.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set. 
29

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE 

Set the second (low) rate throws and 

exponential.

A to down position.

C to D/R.

Repeat steps above to set low rate.

Optional: change dual rate switch 

assignment. Ex: elevator to switch 

G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) with 3 

positions.

C to SW. to G or E.

G or E to center position.

Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.

Where next? (Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.) 

TRAINER p. 47. 

0XOWLSOHZLQJDQGRUWDLOVHUYRVVHHZLQJW\SHVDQGWDLOW\SHVS

Elevator-to-flap, Rudder-to-aileron, flap-to-elevator, and other programmable 

mixes p. 68.

Retractable Gear, Flaps on a Switch, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other 

auxiliary channel setups. p. 46. 
30

$/22.$77+(5$',2
6)81&7,21667(3%<67(3

MODEL submenu: includes three functions that manage model memory: MODEL SELECT, MODELCOPY and MODELNAME. Since 

these functions are all related, and are all basic features used with most models, they are together in the MODEL submenu of 

the BASIC menu. 

NOTE: When you choose a new model in the MODEL SELECT function, if the new 

model is set to a different modulation, you must cycle the transmitter power to change 

PRGXODWLRQV,I\RXGRQRWF\FOHWKHSRZHUWKHPRGXODWLRQW\SHZLOOÀDVKRQWKHKRPH

screen to remind you. Please note: You are still transmitting on the other modulation 

until you affect this change. 

GOAL: STEPS: INPUTS:

Select Model #3. 

N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Open BASIC menu, then open MODEL

submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C if required to MODEL.

Choose Model #3. to 3.

&RQ¿UP\RXUFKDQJH for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays.

Close.

Confirm proper modulation of new 

model memory.

If 2.4GLVÀDVKLQJLQWKHXSSHU ULJKWKDQGFRUQHUWKHQWKHQHZPRGHOLVVHW IRU

WKHRWKHUUHFHLYHUW\SH7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIRQWRFKDQJHWKHPRGXODWLRQ

Where next? NAME the model: see p. 32.

Change MODEL TYPE (aircraft, heli, glider): see p. 34.

Change modulation (2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH): see p. 35.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 38.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 39.

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT for throttle management: see p. 40, 41.

MODEL SELECT: This function selects which of the 15 model memories in the 

transmitter (or 33 in the optional CAMPac-.WR VHW XS RUÀ\)RUFODULW\

the model's name and an image of its type are indicated after its number. (Each 

model memory may be a different model type from the other memories.) 

Note: If you are using the optional CAMPac-16K, your choices in MODEL 

SELECT and MODEL COPY will include 16-33, which are the model memories in 

the CAMPac. You do not have to COPY from the CAMPac to the transmitter 

prior to working with that model. 

T9C/T9CS CAMPac data conversion

Although the CAMPac GDWDWKDW KDV EHHQ VDYHG DVWKH GDWD RI D FRQYHQWLRQDO7&7&6

transmitter cannot be used directly, it is possible to use it by the following method. Copying 

the information to the model memory of a T10C transmitter. When using the CAMPac, the 

information will be displayed. For example, as "01<-Pac 01." Press DIAL for 1 second in 

this state and the check display of "Are you sure?" will appear. Press DIAL again, the data of 

CAMPac will be copied to model number"01" of the T10CG transmitter. As for the data of the function added by T10CG, 

DQLQLWLDOYDOXHLVVHWXSDWWKLVWLPH3OHDVHGRQRWIRUJHWWRFKHFNWKHVHWWLQJVEHIRUHÀ\LQJ

In addition, refer to p.17 for the initializing method of the CAMPac.

T10CG/T10C CAMPac data compatibility

The CAMPac data saved from a T10CG or conventional T10C transmitter can be used directly by a T10CG and T10C 

transmitter. As for the data of functions added by the T10CG:

(T10C data -> T10CG): an initial value is set up at this time.

(T10CG data -> T10C): the function doesn't work regardless of the data.

ÀDVKLQJ
31

MODEL COPYFRSLHVWKHFXUUHQWPRGHOGDWDLQWRDQRWKHUPRGHOPHPRU\LQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURUWKHRSWLRQDO'3..

128K CAMPac). The name of the model memory you are copying into is displayed for clarity. 

Notes:

• Any data in the model copied to will be written over and lost, including name, 

type and modulation. Upon completion, it cannot be recovered. 

• To copy from one T10CG to another, use an optional CAMPac. (Note: The 

model may be flown directly off the CAMPac's memory, not requiring recopying into the 2nd transmitter. For more information on CAMPacs, please 

see p. 10.) 

• With the trainer FUNC mode it is not necessary to have the student radio contain 

the setup of the aircraft. See TRAINER, p. 47. 

Data cannot be converted from 8U or 9Z memory types. If a CAMPac is installed into the T10CG that has data on it 

from another radio type, it will have to be re-initialized which deletes all data. 

Examples:

• Create a new model that is similar to one you have already programmed. 

• Copy the current model data into another model memory as a backup or before experimenting with new settings. 

• Store your model data to an optional CAMPac prior to sending your radio for service. 

(GLW D FRS\ RI \RXUPRGHO¶V GDWDWR À\WKHPRGHOLQ GLIIHUHQW FRQGLWLRQV LH+HOLFRSWHU XVLQJ KHDYLHUZHLJKW EODGHV

glider in extreme wind; airplane model at extreme altitudes). 

• Store your model data to an optional CAMPac to use or copy the settings into a friend's T10CG (A or H) transmitter so 

KHFDQÀ\\RXUPRGHORUXVHLWDVDVWDUWLQJSRLQWIRUVHWWLQJXSDVLPLODUPRGHO

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Copy model 3 into model 5. 

N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Open the BASIC menu, then open MODEL

submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to MODEL.

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

If SELECT does not indicate 3, use MODEL

SELECT, p. 25.

Go to MODEL COPY and choose the 

model to copy into. (Ex: 5)

C to COPY. to 5.

&RQ¿UP\RXUFKDQJH for 1 second. 

Are you sure? displays. *

Close.

Where next? SELECT the copy you just made: see p. 30. 

Rename it (it is currently named exactly the same as the model copied): see p. 32.

Turn off the transmitter and remove the CAMPac for safe keeping or insertion 

LQWRDQRWKHUUDGLRWRÀ\

*Radio emits a repeating "beep" and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior 

to completion, the data will not be copied. 
32

MODEL NAME: assigns a name to the current model memory. By giving each model a name that is immediately recognizable, 

\RXFDQTXLFNO\VHOHFWWKHFRUUHFWPRGHODQGPLQLPL]HWKHFKDQFHRIÀ\LQJWKHZURQJPRGHOPHPRU\ZKLFKFRXOGOHDGWR

a crash. 

Adjustability and values: 

• Up to 10 characters long. 

• Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol. 

• The default names assigned by the factory are in MODEL-xxxx format 

(MODEL-0001IRU¿UVWPRGHOPHPRU\HWF

NOTE: When you COPY one model memory over another, everything is copied, including the model's name. Similarly, if 

you change MODEL TYPE or do a MODEL RESET, the entire memory is reset, including MODEL NAME6RWKH¿UVWWKLQJ\RXZLOO

want to do after you COPY a model, change its type, or start from scratch, is rename the new copy to avoid confusion.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Name model 3 “Cap-232_” (where the 

underline represents a blank space.)

Open MODEL submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to MODEL.

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

If SELECT does not indicate 3,

perform MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

Go to NAME and change the first 

character. (Ex: M to C)

C to M to C.

Choose the next character to change. C

Repeat the prior steps to complete 

naming the model.

to a (note: lower case is available)

Repeat.

Close.

Where next? Change the MODEL TYPE to glider or helicopter: see p. 34.

Change modulation [2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH]: see p. 35.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 38.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.
33

PARAMETER submenu: sets those parameters you would likely set once, and then not disturb again. 

Once you have selected the correct model you wish to work with, the next step is setting up the proper parameters for this 

VSHFL¿FPRGHO

• What is the model's type? 

• What type is the receiver’s modulation [2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH]?

• Does the model have a normal throttle on channel 3 or do you need full range 

trim on channel 3 (ATL)?

• (GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set.

First it is important to clear out any old settings in the memory from prior use, 

using the MODEL RESET.

MODEL RESET: completely resets all data in the individual model you have 

currently selected. Don't worry - there is no way you can accidentally delete all 

models in your radio with this function. Only a service center can completely 

reset your radio's entire memory at once. To delete each model in your radio's 

memory (for example when selling), you must SELECT each model, reset that 

memory, then go SELECT the next memory, etc. 

Note that when you COPY one model memory into another or change the model's type, you need not delete all existing data 

¿UVWE\XVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQCOPY completely overwrites anything in the existing model memory, including MODEL NAME.

The MODEL TYPE function overwrites all data except name and MODUL.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Reset model memory 1. 

N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory. (Ex: 1)

On home screen, check model name and 

number on top left. If it is not correct, 

use MODEL SELECT, p. 30.

Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu. 

C to PARAMETER.

Reset the Memory. for one second.

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH Are you sure? displays. *

Close.

Where next? Now that the memory is reset, name has returned to the default (Ex: 

MODEL-0001).

NAME the model: p. 32.

COPY a different model into this memory: p. 31. 

SELECT a different model to edit or delete: p. 30. 

Change the MODEL TYPE to glider or helicopter: see p. 34. 

Change the receiver modulation [2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH]: see p. 35. 

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 38. 

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 39. 

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

*Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being reset. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior to 

completion, the data will not be reset. 

(ACRO)

(GLID)
34

MODEL TYPE: sets the type of programming used for this model.

The T10CG has 15 model memories, which can each support:

•one powered aircraft (ACROPHPRU\W\SH ZLWKPXOWLSOH ZLQJ DQGWDLO FRQ¿JXUDWLRQV 6HHWZLQ DLOHURQ VHUYRVWZLQ

elevator servos, ELEVON, and V-TAIL for further information.); 

WKUHHJOLGHUZLQJW\SHVDJDLQZLWKPXOWLSOHWDLOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV6HH*OLGHUMODEL TYPE for details, p. 78; 

•eight helicopter swashplate types, including CCPM. See Helicopter MODEL TYPE for details, p. 93. 

%HIRUHGRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXS\RXUDLUFUDIW¿UVW\RXPXVWGHFLGHZKLFKMODEL TYPEEHVW¿WVWKLVSDUWLFXODUDLUFUDIW

(Each model memory may be set to a different model type.) If your transmitter is a T10CAG, the default is ACRO. If it is a 

T10CHG, the default is HELI(H1).

ACRO is the best choice for most powered airplanes, but in some circumstances, GLID(2A+1F) may be a better choice. ACRO

is usually a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not: 

•ACRO adds: 

•SNAP-ROLL

•AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support) 

•For fuel-powered airplanes: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming. 

•But ACRO lacks: 

•5 seperate conditions for optional setups (STARTSPEEDDISTANCELANDING)

If you are using a glider or heli MODEL TYPE, please go to that chapter now to select the proper model type and support 

your model setup. Note that changing MODEL TYPE resets all data for the model memory, including its name. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your 

model. Ex: ACRO.

[NOTE: This is one of several functions 

that requires confirmation to make a 

change. Only critical changes require 

additional keystrokes to accept the 

change.]

Open the BASIC menu, then open the 

PARAMETER submenu.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

then C to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

Go to MODEL TYPE. C to TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: ACRO.

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH

Close PARAMETER.

to ACROBATIC. for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays. WRFRQ¿UP

to return to BASIC menu.
35

Modulation select (MODUL): sets the type of modulation transmitted.

The modulation of your receiver will determine whether you utilize 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH setting in MODUL during 

transmission. Note that you have to turn your transmitter off and back on before a modulation change becomes effective. 

Be sure you understand and set the FailSafe (F/S ) settings as you intended (see p. 50). 

2.4G-10CH7CH = FASST-2.4GHz system (10CHPRGH7CH mode)

Adjustability:

• 2.4G-10CH setting for all Futaba FASST-2.4G Multi-ch mode receivers, 

UHJDUGOHVVRIQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVLH5+65+65)65)6

• 2.4G-7CH setting for all Futaba FASST-2.4G 7ch mode receivers, regardless of 

QXPEHURIFKDQQHOVLH5))5))05)65)6

NOTE: When you change models in MODEL SELECT, if the new model is set to the other modulation type, 

\RXPXVWF\FOHWKHWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUWRFKDQJHPRGXODWLRQV7KHPRGXODWLRQZLOOÀDVKRQWKHKRPHVFUHHQ

to remind you until you do so. See p. 30, MODEL SELECT, for details. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change model 1 from 2.4G-10CH to 

2.4G-7CH.

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory (Ex: 1)

On home screen, check model name and 

number on top left and the modulation 

on top right. If it is not the correct 

model, use MODEL SELECT, p. 30.

Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n 

PARAMETER submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu. 

C to PARAMETER.

Go to MODUL and change setting. C to MODUL. to 2.4G-7CH.

cycle power ÀDVKHVRQVFUHHQ

Close menu and cycle power.

POWER OFF. POWER ON.

Where next? Now that the model is in the proper modulation, the T10CG should communicate 

ZLWKWKHUHFHLYHU,ILWGRHVQRWFRQ¿UPWKHW\SHRIWKHUHFHLYHU

Change MODEL TYPEWRJOLGHUKHOLFRSWHUVHHS

Set F/S settings for when 2.4G receiver sees interference: see p. 50. 

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 38. 

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 39. 

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.
36

Second aileron (AILE-2) (ACROGLID 1A+1FGLID 2A+1F only): changes the default choice for dual aileron servos from 

channels 6 (FLAPERON) to channels 5 and 6 or channels 3 and 6 (GLID 1A+1F only), or 7 (AIL-DIF ) to channels 5 and 7. 

NOTE: Changing AILE-2 only tells the system which servos to utilize if FLAPERON or AIL-DIF is activated. You still must 

activate that function and complete its setup. For details on twin aileron servos, including using AILE-2, see p. 55. 

(GLID 1A+1F only): If using channel 3 for second aileron, the receiver's Battery Fail-Safe function does not work.

Adjustable travel limit (ATL): makes the channel 3 TRIM LEVER (THROTTLE TRIM) effective only at low throttle, 

disabling the trim at high throttle. This prevents pushrod jamming due to idling trim changes. This function defaults to ON.

If you are not using channel 3 for throttle, you may want trim operation the same as on all other channels. To do so, set ATL

to OFF. If you need the ATL to be effective at the top of the stick instead of the bottom, reverse the THR-REV setting. Note 

that this affects all models in the radio, not just the model you are currently editing. See servo REVERSE, p. 38. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change ATL from ON to OFF for battling 

robots, tanks, airbrakes and other 

channel 3 uses.

Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n 

PARAMETER submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to PARAMETER.

Go to ATL and Change. (Ex: to OFF) C to ATL. to OFF.

Close.

Where next? Set up ELEVONIRUWDQNVW\OHFRQWUROWKURWWOHVWHHULQJRQRQH67,&.VHHS

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT to adjust channel 3 servo at low-stick: see p. 40.

5HDVVLJQDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHOVH[IURPGLDOWRVZLWFKVOLGHUVHHS

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 38.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

LCD screen adjustment (CONTRASTBACK-LIGHT):

Adjustability:

The following LCD screen adustments are possible. 

• Contrast adjustment

• Backlighting brightness adjustment 

CONTRAST: adjust the LCD contrast from +10(dark) to -10(bright). Also, it is 

possible to adjust the contrast from the home screen. See Adjusting Display 

Contrast, p.16.

BACK-LIGHT MAXDGMXVWVWKHEDFNOLJKWLQJEULJKWQHVVIRUWKHVSHFL¿FSHULRGDSSUR[LPDWHO\VHFRQGVDIWHURSHUDWLQJWKH

edit keys. Setting range: OFF(0) to 20(bright).

BACK-LIGHT MINDGMXVWVWKHEDFNOLJKWLQJEULJKWQHVVDIWHUWKHDERYHVSHFL¿FSHULRG6HWWLQJUDQJH2))WRMAX setting.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change CONTRAST from 0 to +2. O p e n B A S I C m e n u , t h e n o p e n 

PARAMETER submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to PARAMETER.

Go to CONTRAST and change setting. 

(Ex: +2)

C to CONTRAST.

to +2.

Close.

Throttle Reverse (THR-REV) (GLID only): is a special function that reverses the throttle control, including moving the trim 

functionality to the stick's upper half.

The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set. Default setting depends on the THR-REV setting in the TX SETTING

menu, see p.17.
37

Home screen display mode selection (HOME-DISP) (HELI only): selects the display item in the home screen for HELI.

ILLUST: displays the illustration of helicopter in the home screen. (default)

THR/PIT: displays the current throttle and pitch position in the home screen.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change the display mode from ILLUST to 

THR/PIT.

O p e n B A S I C m e n u , t h e n o p e n 

PARAMETER submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to PARAMETER.

Go to HOME-DISP and change setting. 

(Ex: THR/PIT)

C to HOME-DISP.

to THR/PIT.

Close.

USER NAME: assigns your transmitter's name which is displayed in the home screen. 

Adjustability and values: 

• Up to 10 characters long. 

• Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol. 

• The default name assigned by the factory is the "Futaba" logo.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Name USER NAME “Futaba”. Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n 

PARAMETER submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to PARAMETER.

Go to USER NAME and select the first 

character. (Ex: _ to F)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to USER NAME

to F.

Choose the next character to change. C

Repeat the prior steps to complete 

naming the model.

to u (note: lower case is available)

Repeat.

Close.

ILLUST mode THR/PIT mode
38

Servo reversing (REVERSE): changes the direction an individual servo responds to a CONTROL STICK motion. 

[Since channel 9 and 10 are switch only, its servo REVERSE is in the AUX-CH control screen with its switch assignment. See p. 46.] 

For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section on SWASH AFR (p. 95) before reversing any servos. 

With the exception of CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo reversing prior to any other programming.

When using ACROGLID functions that control multiple servos, such as 

FLAPERON or V-TAIL, it may be confusing to determine whether the servo needs 

to be reversed or a setting in the function needs to be reversed. Refer to the 

instructions for each specialized function for further details. 

Always check servo direction prior to every flight as an additional 

SUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KRRNXSVDQGUDGLRIXQFWLRQ

NOTE: THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to 

the Stick’s upper half. To use THR-REV, turn off the transmitter, hold down the MODE and END keys, turn on. CURSOR

DOWN to THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV. Turn the transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the 

radio. (GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set, see p.36.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Reverse the direction of the elevator 

servo.

Open REVERSE function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to REVERSE.

C h o o s e p r o p e r c h a n n e l a n d s e t 

direction. (Ex: ELEV REV)

C to ELEV.

to REV. for 1 second.

Close.

Where next? Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS

Set up trainer functions: see p. 47.

Logic switch selection (LOGIC SW): The various functions in the T10CG can be selected by switch. The Logic switch can 

be assigned to the following functions: THR-CUT, IDLE DOWN, AUX-CH, TIMER, PROG. MIX, AIRBRAKE, ELEV-FLAP, and AILEFLAP functions. The logic switch can activate functions by two switches combinations. It is also possible to select from 2

types of logic, either AND or OR, can be selected.

Adjustability:

• Three logic switches can be used. 

(Lsw1, Lsw2, and Lsw3)

• SW(1), SW(2), SW(3): 

Any SWITCH A-H or THR-STKS

• Switch position (POSI)

• Logic mode: AND or OR (MODE)

Logic combination table:

SWITCH LOGIC

SW(1) SW(2) AND OR

off off off off

off on off on

on off off on

on on on on

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Ex: Switch A and B are calculated by 

AND logic. (A = down, B = down)

Open BASIC menu, then open LOGIC 

SW menu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to LOGIC SW.

Go to POSI and change setting. 

(Ex: DOWN)

C to POSI.

to DOWN.

Next, SW= B, POSI=DOWN Repeat.

Close.
39

End Point of servo travel adjustment (END POINT, also called EPA): the most flexible version of travel adjustment 

available. It independently adjusts each end of each individual servo’s travel, rather than one setting for the servo that 

affects both directions. Again, for CCPM helicopters, be sure to see SWASH AFR (see p. 95) prior to adjusting end points. 

Adjustability:

• Can set each direction independently. 

• Ranges from 0% (no servo movement at all) to 140%. At a 100% setting, the 

throw of the servo is approximately 40° for channels 1-4 and approximately 

55° for channels 5-8. 

• Reducing the percentage settings reduces the total servo throw in that direction. 

Examples:

• Adjust the throttle high end to avoid binding at the carburetor, and low end to allow for proper carburetor closure. 

$GMXVWÀDSVRXSWUDYHOLVRQO\VXI¿FLHQWIRUVWUDLJKWDQGOHYHOÀLJKWWULPPLQJZLWKIXOOGRZQWUDYHO

• END POINTPD\EHDGMXVWHGWRWRNHHSDVHUYRIURPPRYLQJRQHGLUHFWLRQVXFKDVÀDSVQRWLQWHQGHGWRDOVRRSHUDWHDV

spoilers.

• Retract servos are not proportional. Changing END POINT will not adjust the servo. 

END POINT adjusts only the individual servo. It will have no effect on any other servo that is operated in conjunction with 

this servo via mix or preset programming such as FLAPERON, AILEVATOR, etc. This is so that each individual servo can be 

FDUHIXOO\¿QHWXQHGWRDYRLGELQGLQJDQGRWKHUFRQÀLFWV7RDGMXVWWKHWRWDOWUDYHORIDIXQFWLRQVXFKDVFLAPERON, make 

the adjustments in that function's controls. For CCPM helicopters, adjust the total travel of the function, such as collective 

pitch, in SWASH AFR.

Adjust the linkage or the END POINT? It is nearly always best to adjust your linkages to get as close as possible prior to 

utilizing END POINT. The higher the END POINT setting, the better position accuracy and the more servo power available 

at nearly any position (except if using digital servos). Higher END POINT values also mean longer travel time to reach the 

desired position, as you are utilizing more of the servo's total travel. (For example, using 50% END POINT would give you 

only half the steps of servo travel, meaning every click of trim has twice the effect and the servo gets there in half the 

time).

• end point (and moving the linkage) = torque, accuracy, but transit time to get there. 

• end point (instead of adjusting linkages) = travel time, but torque, accuracy. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Decrease the flap servo throw in the 

upward direction to 5% to allow 

WULPPLQJRIOHYHOÀLJKWRQO\DQGGRZQ

travel to 85% to prevent binding.

Open END POINT function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to END POINT.

Choose proper channel and move stick 

or knob in direction you want to adjust 

DQGVHWVHUYRWKURZ([ÀDSXS

C to FLAP.

ÀDSFRQWURO>GHIDXOWLVVR(A)].

to 5%.*

VR(A). to 85%.

Close.

Where next? Go to SERVOGLVSOD\WRFRQ¿UPWKHGHVLUHGHQGUHVXOWVHHS

0RYHDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHOVWRGLIIHUHQWGLDOVVZLWFKHVVOLGHUVVHHS

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTWRVORZFXWWKHHQJLQHVHHS

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS

Set up trainer functions: see p. 47.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57.

*You can reset to the initial values by pressing the DIAL for one second. 
40

Engine idle management: IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT: functions which work with the digital THROTTLE TRIM to provide 

a simple, consistent means of engine operation. No more fussing with getting trim in just the right spot for landings or 

takeoffs! For additional engine adjustments, see THROTTLE-NEEDLE (p. 65) and THROTTLE DELAY (p. 66). 

IDLE-DOWN (ACRO only): lowers the engine idle for: sitting on the runway prior to take off, stalls and spins, and landings. 

7KHQRUPDOLGOHVHWWLQJLVDOLWWOHKLJKHUIRUHDVLHUVWDUWVDQGVDIHÀLJKWVZLWKOHVVULVNRIGHDGVWLFNV

Important note: The IDLE-DOWN function is not normally used when starting the 

engine, and its accidental operation may keep your engine from starting. The 

10CG warns that IDLE-DOWN is on when the transmitter is turned on. Be sure to 

turn off the function, or override the warning by pressing CURSOR lever if you 

intended the function to be on. 

7KLVPD\EHDVVLJQHGWRDQ\VZLWFKSRVLWLRQ6RPHPRGHOHUVDFFLGHQWDOO\DVVLJQIDLE-DOWN to one side of a switch 

and THR-CUT to the other. There is no “normal” setting to start the engine. By default IDLE-DOWN is set to SWITCH C

center and down. This works well with THR-CUT also on SWITCH CGRZQ7KH6:,7&+XSLVQRUPDOÀLJKWVWDUWLQJ

FHQWHUIRUVORZHUPDQHXYHUVODQGLQJDQGGRZQWRFXWWKHHQJLQH,I\RXDVVLJQIDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT to the springloaded TRAINER SWITCH F (10CAG) or H (10CHG), then use the trainer function, you may risk loss of throttle 

control or deadstick for your student. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Decrease the throttle setting to idle 

with the flip of a switch for spins and 

landings.

Open BASICmenu, then open IDLE-DOWN

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to IDLE-DOWN.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to OFF.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust 

the rate until engine idles as desired.*

THROTTLE STICK.

C to RATE. until engine idles as 

desired.

Optional: change switch assignment.

Choose desired switch and position.**

C to SW. to desired SWITCH.

C to POSI. to desired position.

Close.

Where next? THR-CUT: see p. 41.

*Normally a value of 10- 20%. Secure the fuselage, engine running. Set the THROTTLE STICK to idle. Adjust the IDLE-DOWNUDWHZKLOHÀLSSLQJWKH

switch ON and OFF until the desired idle is achieved. Be sure to throttle up periodically to allow the engine to “clean out” and idle reliably.

*Also LOGIC SW(Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.
41

Throttle cut (THR-CUT) (ACROHELI SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\WR VWRSWKH HQJLQH E\ ÀLSSLQJ D VZLWFKZLWKTHROTTLE 

STICK at idle). The movement is largest at idle and disappears at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. In HELI,

there is an additional setting, THR-HOLD. See p. 99. 

The switch's location and direction must be chosen. It defaults to NULL to avoid 

accidentally assigning it to a switch, which might result in an unintentional dead 

VWLFNLQÀLJKW3OHDVHVHHIDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT on p. 40. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Decrease the throttle setting (at idle) 

to stop the engine with the flip of a 

switch.(Note that you MUST assign 

a switch. The default is NULL. We 

recommend SWITCH C in the down 

position, with IDLE-DOWN programmed 

to SWITCH C in the center and down 

positions.)

Open BASICmenu, then open THR-CUT

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to THR-CUT.

Activate the function. Choose desired 

switch, and the position which activates 

the function.**

C to MIX.

C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to DOWN.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust 

the rate until the engine consistently 

shuts off but throttle linkage is not 

binding.*

C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

C to RATE. until shuts off.

Close.

Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57.


1RUPDOO\DVHWWLQJRILVVXI¿FLHQW9LHZLQJWKHFDUEXUHWRUEDUUHOXQWLOLWIXOO\FORVHVLVDGHTXDWHWRJHWDQDSSUR[LPDWHVHWWLQJWKHQWHVWZLWK

HQJLQHUXQQLQJWRFRQ¿UP

**Also LOGIC SW(Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.
42

'XDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): assigns adjusted rates and exponential. 

Dual/Triple Rates: UHGXFHLQFUHDVHWKH VHUYRWUDYHO E\ IOLSSLQJ D VZLWFK RU

(ACROGLID) they can be engaged by any stick position. Dual rates affect the 

control listed, such as aileron, not just a single (ex: channel 1) servo. For 

example, adjusting aileron dual rate will affect both aileron servos when using 

FLAPERON or AIL-DIF, and both aileron and elevator servos’ travel when using 

AILEVATOR or ELEVON or a CCPM helicopter. 

Activation:

• Any SWITCH, A-H. If you choose a 3-position switch, then that dual rate instantly becomes a triple rate (see example). 

• The glider programming offers you the choice of Cond. This option allows you to have a separate rate for each of 

condition. (GLID)

• Stick position (ACROGLID ([ 2Q UXGGHU \RX QRUPDOO\ XVH RQO\WKH FHQWHU  RIWKH VWLFNPRYHPHQW H[FHSW IRU

H[WUHPHPDQHXYHUV VXFK DV VQDSVVSLQVVWDOOV$VORQJ DV \RXU58''(5 67,&. GRHV QRW H[FHHG  RIPD[LPXP

throw, the rudder responds at your lower rate, allowing small, gentle corrections. When the stick passes 90% (ie. stall 

turn), the rudder goes to high rate’s 90%, which is a MUCH higher amount of travel than your low rate at 89%.) 

Ex: (At 100% = 1”) Low Rate = 50% High Rate = 100%

At 89% Low Rate = .45”

At 90% High Rate = .9”

[Note] Only if any stick is chosen by the item of "SW1", a switch can also be chosen by the item of "SW2." When operated 

simultaneously, the switch operation has priority over the stick operation. (ACRO)

Adjustability:

• Range: 0 - 140% (0% would deactivate the control completely.) Initial value = 

100%

• Adjustable for each direction (ACROGLIDLH8SGRZQOHIWULJKW([0RVW

PRGHOVÀ\XSULJKWZLWKRXWDQ\HOHYDWRUWULPEXWUHTXLUHVRPHGRZQHOHYDWRU

ZKHQLQYHUWHGMXVWWRPDLQWDLQOHYHOÀLJKW%\LQFUHDVLQJWKHGRZQWUDYHOE\

the amount required to hold the model inverted, the model now has equal 

travel available from level upright or level inverted.) 

Exponential:FKDQJHVWKHUHVSRQVHFXUYHRIWKHVHUYRVUHODWLYHWRWKHVWLFNSRVLWLRQWRPDNHÀ\LQJPRUHSOHDVDQW<RXFDQ

make the servo movement less or more sensitive around neutral for rudder, aileron, elevator, and throttle (except HELI type 

- use THROTTLE CURVE instead). (ACRO type—throttle EXP and THROTTLE CURVE can not be activated simultaneously). 

Why use expo? Many models require a large amount of travel to perform their best tricks. However, without exponential, 

WKH\DUH3WRXFK\ ́DURXQGQHXWUDOPDNLQJWKHPXQSOHDVDQWWRÀ\DQGPDNLQJVPDOOFRUUHFWLRQVYHU\GLI¿FXOW$GGLWLRQDOO\

by setting different exponentials for each rate, you can make the effectiveness of small corrections similar in each rate, as 

in our example below. 

The best way to understand exponential is to try it: 

• Having made no changes yet in the D/R,EXP screen, move SWITCH D to “down” (toward the AILERON STICK).

• Cursor down to EXP and dial to +100%. 

• Move SWITCH D up. Hold the AILERON STICKDWVWLFNDQGPRYHSWITCH D down. 

• Notice how much less travel there is. 

*RWRVWLFNDQGUHSHDW1RWLFHKRZWKHWUDYHOLVPXFKFORVHULIQRWLGHQWLFDO

High Rate

High Rate

Low Rate High Rate

Low Rate

100% 100%

0% 30% 100%

90% 90% 0%
43

Adjustability:

• More sensitivity around neutral. (positive exponential, see example) 

• Less sensitivity around neutral. (negative exponential, see example) 

• Adjustable for each direction. (ACROGLID)

For throttle, exponential is applied at the low end to help nitro and gasoline engines have a linear throttle response, so that

HDFKVWLFNLQFUHDVHVHQJLQH530RIWKHDYDLODEOHUDQJH,QPRVWHQJLQHVWKLVUDQJHVIURP

Special note for helicopters: Helicopter model types have just a single rate for each switch position rather than a rate 

for each side of the servo’s travel per switch position. Additionally, setting the D/R,EXP for each switch position requires 

cursoring back to the No.VHWWLQJDQGFKDQJLQJWKHVZLWFKSRVLWLRQKHUH-XVWÀLSSLQJWKHVZLWFKGRHVQRWDIIHFWWKHVFUHHQ

setting, allowing dual rates to be assigned with idle-up and other features on certain switches, and does not require putting 

WKHPRGHOLQWKDWFRQGLWLRQWRPDNHPRGL¿FDWLRQV

Special note for conditions: The helicopter and glider programming offers you the choice of Cond.. This option allows 

you to have a separate rate for each of the 3 controls automatically selected when changing conditions, for a total of FIVE 

rates available. 

Simply change the switch choice to Cond. and then:

(HELI) press the CURSOR LEVER to toggle through the 5 conditions while setting the rates.

(GLID) activate the corresponding condition to edit the rates.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up dual rates and exponential in a 

HELI model.

Open D/R,EXP. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to D/R,EXP.

Choose channel. C to desired channel.

&KRRVH¿UVWVZLWFKSRVLWLRQ C to No>. to UP.

Set rate and exponential (Ex: high rate 

= 95%, 0% exponential.)

C to D/R>. to 95%.

&RQ¿UP0% EXP.

Go to 2nd switch position and set rate 

and exponential.

C to No>. to DN.

Repeat above.

Optional: if using a 3 position switch, 

set 3rd rate.

C to No>. to CT. 

Repeat above.

Optional: assign dual rates to have one 

for each condition.

C to SW. to COND.

Repeat steps above to adjust for each 

condition.
44

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up aileron triple rates on SWITCH

C with travel settings of 75% (normal), 

25% (slow roll) and 140% (extreme 

aerobatics) and exponential settings of 

0%, +15%, and -40% respectively.

NOTE: This normal rate has no 

exponential so it has a very linear, 

normal feel. This slow roll rate has 

positive exponential (the opposite of 

what most people normally use), which 

makes the servos more responsive 

around center. This makes the servos 

feel the same around center in the 

normal and low rates, but still gives a 

very slow roll rate at full stick.

The 3D rate (extreme aerobatics) has a 

very high distance of travel nearly twice 

that of the normal rate. Therefore, using 

a very high negative exponential setting 

softens how the servos respond around 

center stick. This makes the servos 

respond similarly around center stick 

for a more comfortable feel.

Many modelers like to set up all 3 triple 

rates on a single 3-position switch, 

creating a “slow and pretty mode”, 

a “normal mode”, and a “wild stunts 

mode” all with the flip of a single 

switch. To do so, simply set up rates 

for all 3 controls and assign all 3 to the 

same 3-position switch.

Open D/R,EXP function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to D/R,EXP.

Choose the channel to change 

(Ex: aileron is already selected)

C to desired channel. 

Optional: change switch assignment. C to SW1. to C.

Confirm switch is in desired position 

and set rate. (Ex: up = high rate, 75%).

C to D/R>.

C to up position.

AILERON STICK. to 75%.

AILERON STICK. to 75%.

Move SWITCH to 2nd rate position and 

set this particular rate. 

(Ex: center = low rate, 25%).

C to center position.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

Optional: if using a 3 position SWITCH, 

move SWITCH to 3rd position and set 

this rate (Ex: down = 3D rate, 140%).

C to down position.

AILERON STICK. to 140%.

AILERON STICK. to 140%. 

Optional: instead of using a switch, 

you can set high rates to be triggered 

when the stick moves past a certain 

point. To test this, set aileron high rate 

to 25%. Now set switch assignment to 

AIL (90%). Move AILERON STICK

to the right and notice the huge jump in 

travel after the stick moves 90% of its 

distance.

C to SW1. to AILE (90%).

C to D/R>.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

AILERON STICK and watch 

screen graph. See the change?! 

You may also change the trigger point 

by holding the stick at the desired point, 

then pressing and holding the DIAL.

Set each rate’s EXP.

(Ex: 0%, +15%, -40%)

C to EXP>.

C to up position.

&RQ¿UPEXP reads 0.

C to down position.

AILERON STICK. to +15%.

AILERON STICK. to + 15%.

C to center position.

repeat to set low rate expo to -40%. 

Repeat above steps for elevator and rudder. 

Close.

Where next? 6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47.

Adjust the sensitivity of the trims: see p. 48.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57.

6HWXSSURJUDPPDEOHPL[HVWRPHHW\RXUVSHFL¿FQHHGVVHHS
45

TIMER submenu (stopwatch functions): controls three electronic clocks. For example, these clocks may be used to keep 

WUDFNRIWLPHUHPDLQLQJLQDFRPSHWLWLRQÀ\LQJWLPHRQDWDQNRIIXHODQGRUDPRXQWRIWLPHRQDEDWWHU\HWF

Adjustability:

• Count down timer: starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining. If the time is exceeded, it continues to count 

below 0. 

• Count up timer: starts at 0 and displays the elapsed time up to 99 minutes 59 seconds. 

• Count down timer (Stop type): starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining, and stops at 0.

• Model timer: cumulates ON time up to 99 hours 59 minites each model. Once the Model timer function is turned off, the 

cumulative time will also be reset to "0:00". 

• Independent to each model, and automatically updates with model change. 

• In either TIMER mode, the timer beeps once each minute. During the last twenty seconds, there's a beep each two seconds. 

'XULQJWKHODVWWHQVHFRQGVWKHUH
VEHHSVHDFKVHFRQG$ORQJWRQHLVHPLWWHGZKHQWKHWLPHVHOHFWHGLVUHDFKHG83

DOWN TIMER)

• To Reset, choose the desired timer with the CURSOR lever (while at the startup screen), then press and hold DIAL for 1 

second.

• Activation by either direction of SWITCH A-H, by THROTTLE STICK (STK-THR) (Using the THROTTLE STICK is 

convenient if you are keeping track of fuel remaining, or for an electric, how much battery is left), by LOGIC SWITCH 

Lsw1-Lsw3 or by the power SWITCH (PWR SW). Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

• Also the reset switch can be assigned (SWITCH A-H or LOGIC SWITCH Lsw1-Lsw3)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

6HWWLPHUWRFRXQWGRZQPLQXWHV

being controlled by THROTTLE 

STICK position. This is utilized to keep 

track of actual Throttle on time to better 

FRUUHODWHZLWKIXHOEDWWHU\XVDJH

Open BASIC menu, then open TIMER

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2.

C to TIMER.

Go to TIMER<2>. C to 10 (TIMER<2>).

Adjust time to 4 min. 30 sec., count 

down.

to 4. C to 00 (TIMER<2>).

to 30.

Assign to THROTTLE STICK and set 

trigger point.

C to ON>SwA (TIMER<2>).

to STK THR.

C to 50%. for 1 second to NULL.

THROTTLE STICK to desired 

SRVLWLRQ([VWLFN

for 1 second to set.

Close.

Where next? Adjust END POINTsDIWHU¿UVWÀLJKWWHVWVHHS

$GMXVWDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHODVVLJQPHQWVH[PRYHÀDSVWRDVZLWFKVHHS

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47.

TIMER<1>

TIMER<2>

TIMER<3>

(Home screen)
46

Auxiliary channel function (including channel 9-10 controls)(AUX-CHGH¿QHVWKHUHODWLRQVKLSEHWZHHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU

controls and the receiver output for channels 5-10. Also, the CH9-10 POSI are used to change the CH9-10 servo direction. 

Note that the CH9-10 functions are only visible in the AUX-CH screen when 2.4H-10CH modulation is selected. Channels 

8-10 are not supported in 2.4G-7CH modulation.

Adjustability:

• Channels 5-8 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H), LOGIC SWITCH 

(Lsw1-Lsw3), slider [VR(D) and VR(E)], or knob [VR(A-C)] for example, 

moving flaps to a switch or slider, but not the primary control sticks (use 

programmable mixes to do so, p. 68). (GLID 1A+1F only): Channel 6 may be 

assigned to Airbrake control stick (STK-ARBK).

• Channels 9-10 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H), LOGIC SWITCH 

(Lsw1-Lsw3) and the servo direction may be changed. 

• Multiple channels may be assigned to the same switch, slider or knob; 

• Channels set to "NULL" are only controlled by mixes. (Ex: utilizing 2

channels for 2 rudder servos. See mixes, p. 68.) 

• If GYRO SENSE, GOVERNOR, and THR-NEEDLE functions are activated, AUX-CH

settings of related channels become invalid automatically. 

Related channels: 

GYRO SENSE (ACRO): ch. 5, 7, or 8: see p. 73.

GYRO SENSE (HELI): ch. 5: see p. 107.

GOVERNOR (HELI): ch. 7, or ch. 7 and 8: see p. 108.

THR-NEEDLE (ACROHELI): ch. 8: see p. 65.

Remember that if you assign primary control of a channel to a switch which you later use for other functions (like 

GXDOWULSOHUDWHVRUDLUEUDNHVHYHU\WLPH\RXXVHWKDWRWKHUIXQFWLRQ\RXZLOODOVREHPRYLQJWKHDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHO

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

$VVLJQÀDSVWRWKH ULJKWVOLGHU >VR(E)]

and set channel 7 to NULL in preparation 

to use it as a smoke system control (the 

smoke system being activated later by a 

throttle-to-ch.-7 mix).

Open BASIC menu, then open AUX-CH

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2. C to AUX-CH.

Choose the channel to change. (ex: ch. 

6.)

C to Ch 7.

Change primary control. (ex: to slider.) to Vr-E.

Repeat as needed. (ex: ch. 7 to NULL.) C to Ch 7. to NULL.

Close.

Where next? Programmable mixes: see p. 68.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Adjust SUB-TRIM of auxiliary channel to adjust center SWITCH position: 

see p. 49.

Adjust END POINTs (sets end points of travel even when using a switch): 

see p. 39.
47

TRAINER: for training novice pilots with optional trainer cord connecting 2 transmitters. The instructor has several levels of 

controllability. 

Adjustability:

• NORM: When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can 

be controlled by the student. The set channel is controlled according to any 

programming set at the student's transmitter. 

•FUNC: When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can 

be controlled by the student, controlled according to any mixing set at the 

instructor's transmitter. 

• MIX: When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by both the student and 

the instructor, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter. And the student's mixing rate is 

adjustable. (default 30%) 

[Note] However, it becomes invalid even if the channel is not in a student's transmitter. The channel serves as operation by 

the instructor's transmitter automatically. 

• OFF: The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. The set 

channel is controlled by the instructor only, even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. 

• SWITCH: controlled by spring-loaded SWITCH F (10CAG) or H (10CHG) only. Not assignable. 

• Compatibility: The 10CG may be master or student with any Futaba transmitter compatible with the cord. Simply plug 

the optional trainer cord (For 10CG series, sold separately) into the trainer connection on each transmitter, and follow the 

guidelines below.

Examples:

:KHQWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYH DUH VHWWRFUNC,

5-channel helicopter practice is possible 

with a 4-channel transmitter. 

• Set up the model in a second transmitter, 

use NORM mode to quickly and safely check 

proper operation of all functions, then allow 

WKHVWXGHQWUDGLRWRIXOO\À\WKHPRGHO

• Using NORM mode, set lower throws, 

different exponentials, even different 

auxiliary channel settings on the student 

radio (if it has these features). 

• To ease the learning curve, elevator and 

aileron may be set to the NORM or FUNC

mode, with the other channels set to OFF 

and controlled by the instructor. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Turn on the TRAINER system and set up 

so student has: fully functional control 

of aileron and elevator to support 

FLAPERON and AILEVATOR; normal 

control of rudder to allow lowered 

travel; and no throttle channel control 

(with the instructor for safety).

Open BASICmenu, then open TRAINER

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2. C to TRAINER.

Activate TRAINER. to OFF.

Choose desired channel(s) and proper 

training type(s).

C past AIL and ELE (default OK).

C to THR, to OFF.

C to RUD, to NORM.

Close.

7(67VWXGHQWUDGLRIXQFWLRQIXOO\SULRUWRDWWHPSWLQJWRÀ\

Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP) on student 10CG: see p.42.

Reset trims on student 10CG: see p. 48.

Precautions: 

• NEVER turn on the student's transmitter power. 

• ALWAYS set the student transmitter modulation mode to PPM.

As for a T10CG transmitter, PPM signal is always sent by the trainer jack 

regardless of the modulation mode.

• BE SURE that the student and instructor transmitters have identical trim 

settings and control motions. Verify by switching back and forth while 

moving the control sticks. 

• Always remove the student transmitter's RF module (if it is a moduletype transmitter). 

• When the TRAINER function is active, the snap roll function is deactivated. 

Other functions, such as IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT, which have been 

assigned to the same switch, are not deactivated. Always double check 

your function assignments prior to utilizing the TRAINER function. 

• When you select a different model, the TRAINER function is deactivated in 

the current model for safety reasons. 
48

TRIM submenu: resets and adjust effectiveness of digital trims. 

The 10CG has digital trims which are different from conventional mechanical 

trim sliders. Each TRIM LEVER is actually a two-directional switch. Each time 

the TRIM LEVER is pressed, the trim is changed a selected amount. When you 

hold the TRIM LEVER, the trim speed increases. The current trim position is 

graphically displayed on the start up screen. The TRIM submenu includes two 

functions that are used to manage the trim options. 

HELI models only: OFFSET is available in the idle ups. If OFFSET is inhibited, adjustment of the TRIM LEVERS will adjust 

WKHWULPVIRUDOOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV,IOFFSET is active, then moving the trims within any one condition will effect only that 

condition. See OFFSET, p. 102.

Trim reset (RESET): electronically centers the trims to their default values. Note that the SUB-TRIM settings and the trim 

STEP rate are not reset by this command. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Reset trims to neutral after having 

adjusted all linkages.

N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Open BASICmenu, then open TRIM

submenu.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to TRIM.

Request DQGFRQ¿UPWKHUHVHW. for 1 second. 

Beep sounds.

Close.

Where next? Adjust SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49.

Adjust trim rate (STEP): see below.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Trim step (STEP): changes the rate at which the trim moves when the TRIM LEVER is activated. It may be set from 1 to 

40 units, depending on the characteristics of the aircraft. Most ordinary aircraft do well at about 2 to 10 units. Generally 

ODUJHUWULPVWHSVDUHIRUPRGHOVZLWKODUJHFRQWUROWKURZVRUIRU¿UVWÀLJKWVWRHQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWWULPWRSURSHUO\FRUUHFWWKH

PRGHO6PDOOHUWULPVWHSVDUHODWHUXVHGWRDOORZYHU\¿QHDGMXVWPHQWVLQÀLJKW

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Double the sensitivity (larger step) of 

the AILERON TRIM LEVERS for 

a first flight of an aerobatic model to 

HQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWUDQJHWRWULPWKHPRGHO

IRUOHYHOÀLJKW

Open TRIM submenu and choose the 

STEP you wish to change. (Ex: aileron)

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to TRIM.

Adjust the size of the step. 

(Ex: incr. to 8)

C to AILE. to 8.

Repeat as desired for other channels. C to ELEV. to new setting.

Repeat as needed.

Close.

Where next? Adjust sub trims: see p. 49.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.
49

SUB-TRIM: makes small changes or corrections to the neutral position of each servo. Range is -120 to +120, with 0 setting, 

the default, being no SUB-TRIM.

We recommend that you center the digital trims before making SUB-TRIM

changes, and that you try to keep all of the SUB-TRIM values as small as 

possible. Larger SUB-TRIM values affect the servo's range of travel is restricted 

on one side. 

The recommended procedure is as follows: 

• measure and record the desired surface position; 

• zero out both the trims (TRIM RESET menu) and the SUB-TRIMs (this menu); 

• mount servo arms and linkages so that the control surface’s neutral is as correct as possible; and 

• use a small amount of SUB-TRIMWRPDNH¿QHFRUUHFWLRQV

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Adjust the flap servo's SUB-TRIM until 

its center exactly matches the aileron 

servo's center, as they work together as 

ÀDSHURQV

Open BASIC menu, then open SUB-TRIM. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to SUB-TRIM.

Choose the channel to adjust, and adjust 

XQWLOVXUIDFHVPDWFK([ÀDS

C to FLAP

as needed. C to each channel, 

Repeat for other channels. as needed.

Close.

Where next? Adjust trim steps: see p. 48.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

The servo submenu includes two features: 

• real-time bar-graph display to demonstrate exactly what commands the 

transmitter is sending to the servos. (This can be particularly handy in setting 

up models with complicated mixing functions, because the results of each 

stick, lever, knob, switch input and delay circuit may be immediately seen.) 

VHUYR F\FOH IXQFWLRQWR KHOSORFDWH VHUYR SUREOHPV SULRUWRLQÀLJKW IDLOXUHV

(channels 1-8)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

View the result of reassigning channel 

6 from VR(A) knob to three-position 

SWITCH C.

Cycle the channel 6 servo.

C o m p l e t e d e s i r e d p r o g r a m m i n g 

function. (Ex: in AUX-CH, move ch. 6 to 

SWITCH C)

See AUX-CH for details. (p. 39.)

Open the SERVO function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to SERVO.

Move each control to see the operation. 

(Ex: SWITCH C in all positions)

C to center position.

Note change in position of ch. 6 servo.

Prepare all servos to be cycled and cycle. Plug in servos. POWER ON.

End cycling and close.

Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up desired programmable mixes: see p. 61.

Set up dual aileron servos: see p. 51.

Set up dual elevator servos: see p. 57.

SERVO display and cycle submenu: displays radio's output to channels 1-10. 
50

FailSafe (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) submenu (F/S): sets responses in case of loss of signal or low Rx 

battery. 

FailSafe (F/S): instructs a 2.4G receiver what to do in the event radio interference is received. 

Adjustability:

• Each channel may be set independently. (2.4G-7CH mode: ch3 only)

• The NOR (normal) setting holds the servo in its last commanded position. 

• The F/S (FailSafe) function moves each servo to a predetermined position. 

• NOTE: the setting of the throttle's F/S also applies to the Battery F/S (see 

below).

Examples:

• The F/S setting is used in certain competitions to prevent the aircraft from flying away and doing potential damage 

elsewhere. Conversely, the F/SVHWWLQJPD\DOVREHXVHGWRJRWRQHXWUDORQDOOVHUYRVKRSHIXOO\NHHSLQJWKHSODQHÀ\LQJ

long enough to regain control. 

• Competition modelers often maintain the NOR function so that brief interference will not affect their model's maneuver. 

• Set the throttle channel so that the engine idles when there is interference (ACRO7KLVPD\JLYHHQRXJKWLPHWRÀ\DZD\

from and recover from the radio interference and minimize damage if crashed. 

• For helicopters, NOR is typically the safest choice. 

• We also recommend setting a gasoline engine's electronic kill switch to the OFF position in the F/S function for safety reasons. 

Updating F/S Settings: If you specify a F/S setting, the FailSafe data is automatically transmitted. When you choose the 

F/S mode, check that your settings are as desired by turning off the transmitter power switch and verifying that the servos 

move to the settings that you chose. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change the receiver FailSafe command 

for channel 8 (gasoline engine kill 

switch) to a preset position.

N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Open the BASIC menu, then open F/S

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to F/S.

Choose Channel to change. (ex: Ch. 8) C to Ch 8.

Set and FRQ¿UP fail safe command. that controls channel 8 to desired 

OFF position.

for 1 second to store.

Repeat as desired.

Close.

Where next? Read below for information on Battery FailSafe.

Adjust END POINTs to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 39.

Adjust SUB-TRIM to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 49.

Battery FailSafe (F/S): a second battery low warning feature (separate from the transmitter low voltage warning). When 

the airborne battery voltage drops below approximately 3.8V, the 2.4G receiver’s battery F/S function moves the throttle 

to a predetermined position. When the Battery F/S function is activated, your engine will move to idle (if you haven't set a 

position) or a preset position. You should immediately land. You may temporarily reset the Battery F/S function by moving 

the THROTTLE STICK to idle. You will have about 30 seconds of throttle control before the battery function reactivates. 

Adjustability:

• NOR F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S going to the servo position reached by moving THROTTLE STICK to 

the bottom with TRIM LEVER centered; 

•F/S position setting for throttle results in Battery F/S also going to the same throttle servo position as the regular F/S.

If using a 6V (5-cell) receiver battery, it is very likely that your battery will be rapidly running out of charge before 

battery FailSafe takes over. It is not a good idea to count on battery FailSafe to protect your model at any time. This is 

especially true when using a 5-cell battery. 
51

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS: 

Aircraft wing types (ACROGLID):

There are 3 basic wing types in aircraft models: 

• Simple. Model uses one aileron servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness into a single receiver channel) and has a tail. 

This is the default setup and requires no specialized wing programming. 

• Twin Aileron Servos. Model uses 2 aileron servos and has a tail. see Twin Aileron Servos. 

• Tail-less model (flying wing). Model uses 2 wing servos working together to create both roll and pitch control. see 

ELEVON.

Twin Aileron Servos (with a tail) (ACROGLID): Many current generation models use two aileron servos, plugged into two 

VHSDUDWHUHFHLYHUFKDQQHOV,I\RXUPRGHOLVDÀ\LQJZLQJZLWKRXWVHSDUDWHHOHYDWRUVVHHELEVON, p. 56.) 

%HQH¿WV

• Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel. 

• Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision. 

• Ease of assembly and more torque per surface by not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces. 

+DYLQJPRUHXSDLOHURQWUDYHOWKDQGRZQWUDYHOIRUVWUDLJKWHUUROOVDLOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDOVHHJORVVDU\IRUGH¿QLWLRQ

8VLQJWKHWZRDLOHURQVQRWRQO\DVDLOHURQVEXWDOVRDVÀDSVLQZKLFKFDVHWKH\DUHFDOOHGÀDSHURQV

• Set a negative percentage to reverse the operation of one of the servos. 

Options:

•FLAPERON:

•Uses CH6 for the second servo. 

$OORZVÀDSDFWLRQDVZHOODVDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPWKHDLOHURQV

•Provides FLAP-TRIMIXQFWLRQWRDGMXVWWKHQHXWUDOSRLQWRIWKHÀDSHURQVIRUOHYHOÀLJKW

•Also allows aileron differential in its own programming (instead of activating AIL-DIFF).

• Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF):

•Uses CH7 for the 2nd servo. 

/HDYHV&+	&+IUHHIRUÀDSRSHUDWLRQVXFKDVÀDSHURQDQGÀDSDFWLRQWRJHWKHULQAIRBRAKE. (see p. 63). 

•Allows for more up aileron travel than down for straighter rolls. 

You will need to choose either of FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF for your model's setup. If you need the ailerons to also operate as 

ÀDSV\RXZLOOPRVWOLNHO\ZDQWWRXVHFLAPERON,I\RXUPRGHOKDVDLOHURQVHUYRVDQGÀDSVWKHQAIL-DIFF is probably the 

easiest choice. (For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos using full span ailerons 

DQGIXOOVSDQÀDSVDVZHOODVAIRBRAKEFURZDQGRWKHUIHDWXUHVSOHDVHYLVLWRXU)$4DWZZZIXWDEDUFFRP?IDT?0DQ\

other setup examples are also available at this site.) 

NOTE: Only one of the three wing-type functions (FLAPERON, AIL-DIFF, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. All three 

IXQFWLRQVFDQQRWEHDFWLYDWHGVLPXOWDQHRXVO\7RDFWLYDWHDGLIIHUHQWZLQJW\SHWKH¿UVWPXVWEHGHDFWLYDWHG

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Deactivate FLAPERON so that AIL-DIFF or 

ELEVON can be activated.

Open the FLAPERON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to FLAPERON.

Deactivate the function. C to MIX. to INH.

Close function.

Where next? Set up AILE-DIFF (see p. 54) or ELEVON (see p. 56).
52

Using FLAPERON (ACROGLID 1A+1F ): 

The FLAPERONPL[LQJIXQFWLRQXVHVRQHVHUYRRQHDFKRIWKHWZRDLOHURQVDQGXVHVWKHPIRUERWKDLOHURQDQGÀDSIXQFWLRQ

)RUÀDSHIIHFWWKHDLOHURQVUDLVHORZHUVLPXOWDQHRXVO\2IFRXUVHDLOHURQIXQFWLRQPRYLQJLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVLVDOVR

performed.

[Note] When changing the polarity (positive or negative) of a rate, "change rate dir?" is displayed as a check. 

Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling the alarm display. (GLID only) 

Once FLAPERONLVDFWLYDWHGDQ\WLPH\RXSURJUDP&+RUÀDSLHELEVATOR-FLAP mixing), the radio commands both 

VHUYRVWR RSHUDWHDVÀDSV7KHDPRXQW RIWUDYHODYDLODEOHDVÀDSVLVLQGHSHQGHQWO\DGMXVWDEOHLQFLAPERON. A trimming 

feature is also available (see FLAP-TRIMWR DGMXVW ERWK QHXWUDO SRVLWLRQVWRJHWKHU IRU VWUDLJKWDQGOHYHO ÀLJKW RU VOLJKW

LQFUHDVHVGHFUHDVHVRIWKHÀDSDQJOHEND POINT and SUB-TRIM both still adjust each servo individually. 

Adjustability:

• Each aileron servo's up travel can be set separate from its down travel, creating aileron differential. (See example). 

(DFKDLOHURQVHUYR
VWUDYHOZKHQDFWXDWHGDVDÀDSLVVHSDUDWHO\DGMXVWDEOH

• The separate FLAPERON settings for each condition can be set. (GLID)

127($FWLYDWLQJÀDSHURQVRQO\PDNHVWKHDLOHURQVZRUNDVDLOHURQVDQGWHOOVWKHUDGLRKRZIDU\RXZDQWWKHPWRPRYH

DVÀDSV,IGHVLUHG\RXWKHQDFWLYDWHRWKHUSURJUDPPLQJWKDWPRYHVWKHPDVÀDSV

FLAP-TRIMLVWKHÀDSWULPPLQJIHDWXUHWKDWDOORZVWKHÀDSVWRPRYHLQUHDFWLRQWRWKHFKDQQHOFRQWURO,WLVPHDQWRQO\

IRUWULPPLQJWKHÀDSV
FHQWHUEXWFDQDOVREHXVHGDVIXOOÀDSFRQWURO6HHS

AIRBRAKELVDIHDWXUHWKDWGURSVÀDSHURQVDVÀDSDQGDOVRFRPSHQVDWHVZLWKHOHYDWRULIGHVLUHG6HHS

ELEVATOR-FLAPZRXOGDGGHOHYDWRUPL[LQJLQWRWKHÀDSPRYHPHQWIURPWKHÀDSGLDODIWHUFLAP-TRIM is activated. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate twin aileron servos, FLAPERON.

Input 10% less down travel than up 

travel (aileron differential) within the 

FLAPERON programming. (Decrease right 

aileron is down travel to 90%, decrease 

left aileron's down travel to 90%.) 

$GMXVWWRWDOÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOHWR

of aileron travel available.

Open the FLAPERON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to FLAPERON.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Optional: adjust the up/down travel 

separately for the 2 servos.(Ex: 90% 

down.)

C to AIL1. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

C to AIL2. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

Optional: adjust the aileron's travel so 

WKH\PRYHDVÀDSV([HDFKVHUYRÀDS

travel to 50%.)

C to FLP2. to +50%.

C to FLP1. to -50%.

Close menu.

Where next? Set FLAP-TRIM: see p. 53.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 63.

0L[ÀDSHURQ
VÀDSPRWLRQWRDQRWKHULQERDUGÀDSSOXJJHGLQWRDX[VHHS

9LHZDGGLWLRQDOPRGHOVHWXSVRQWKHLQWHUQHWZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT

* If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate AIL-DIFF or ELEVON. see p. 51.

(ACRO) (GLID 1A+1F)
53

Using FLAP-TRIM FDPEHUWRDGMXVWÀDSHURQV (ACROGLID ) 

FLAP-TRIM assigns the primary flaperon control [defaults to VR(A)] to allow trimming in flight of the flap action of 

ÀDSHURQV1RWHHYHQLIFLAP-TRIM is made active with AIL-DIFF, it will not have any effect. The ONLY function that allows 

FRQWURORIWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWKHAIL-DIFFFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVAIRBRAKE.) Most modelers use AIRBRAKE, or programmable 

PL[HVWRPRYHWKHÀDSVWRDVSHFL¿HGSRVLWLRQYLDPRYHPHQWRIDVZLWFK

FLAP-TRIMPD\DOVREHXVHGDVWKHSULPDU\ÀDSFRQWUROLQÀLJKW%\GRLQJVR\RXFDQDVVLJQ&+WRDSRVLWLRQVZLWFK

ZLWK D VSRLOHURQ QHXWUDO DQG IODSHURQ SRVLWLRQ DQG HYHQ DGMXVWWKH SHUFHQWDJHWUDYHOHG DV IODSHURQVSRLOHURQ E\

changing the Flap Trim travel. (Note that there is only one setting, not independent settings for up and down travel.) 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Add FLAP-TRIM to allow the model's 

DLOHURQVWREHWULPPHGWRJHWKHUDVÀDSV

at any time during the flight,with a 

maximum travel of 5%RIWKHWRWDOÀDS

travel set in FLAPERON.

Open the FLAP-TRIM function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to FLAP-TRIM.

The function is automatically activated with FLAPERON; however, the default 

travel is 0.

Adjust the travel available to the 

flaperons when turning the CH6 

DIAL.(Ex: 5%).

to 5%.

Optional: Use as total flap control.

Reassign CH6 is primary control in 

AUX-CHWR\RXUGHVLUHGÀDSFRQWURO

(Ex: right slider)

to 50%.

C to AUX-CH.

C to CH6. to Vr-E.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49 and END POINTs: see p. 39. 

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 63 and ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 62.

0L[ÀDSHURQ
VÀDSPRYHPHQWWRDQDGGLWLRQDOLQERDUGÀDSSOXJJHGLQWRDX[

see p. 61.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.

(ACRO) (GLID)
54

Using Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF)(ACROGLID 2A+1FGLID 2A+2F):

$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDOLVSULPDULO\XVHGRQRUVHUYRZLQJVZLWKRQHVHUYRVRSHUDWLQJLQERDUGÀDSVRQ&+RU&+

& CH6, and AILE-DIFF controlling proper aileron operation of 2 aileron servos, plugged into CH1 and CH7. The ailerons 

FDQQRWEHPRYHGOLNHÀDSVZKHQXVLQJAILE-DIFF, except if using AIRBRAKE (see p. 63.) (Note that even if you make FLAPTRIM active while using AILE-DIFF, it will not have any effect. ONLY AIRBRAKEFRQWUROVWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWKHAILE-DIFF

FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ

>1RWH@:KHQFKDQJLQJWKHSRODULW\SRVLWLYHRUQHJDWLYHRIDUDWHLQFDPEHUÀDSFKDQJHUDWHGLU"LVGLVSOD\HGDV

a check. Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling the alarm display. (GLID only) 

)/$3IXQFWLRQDOORZV\RXWRVHWXSRUVHUYRVIRUÀDSDFWLRQ

• The separate AILE-DIFF settings for each condition can be set. (GLID only)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate twin aileron servos using AILDIFF.

Note that the function defaults to no 

difference in down travel vs. up travel. 

If you want differential travel, simply 

adjust each side. (Ex: 90%)

Open the AIL-DIFF function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to AIL-DIFF. *

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

2SWLRQDO DGMXVWWKH XSGRZQWUDYHO

separately for the two servos. 

(Ex: adjust to 90%.)

C to AIL1. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

C to AIL2. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49 and END POINTs: see p. 39. 

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 63.

Set up ELEV-FLAPPL[RQO\LIPRGHOKDVDÀDSVHUYRLQ&+VHHS

Set up SNAP-ROLL Function: see p. 59. 

View additional model setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.

*If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate ELEVON or FLAPERON. See p. 51. 

(ACRO) (GLID 2A+1FGLID 2A+2F)
55

Using Twin Aileron Servos, AILE-2 (ACROGLID ):

AILE-2 only tells the radio that you are using CH5 and CH6 (FLAPERON), or CH5 

and CH7 (AIL-DIFF), not CH6 or CH7, as the second servo in FLAPERON or AILEDIFF. You still must activate and set up the FLAPERONAILE-DIFF function. 

Note that selecting CH6&5 or CH7&5 does NOT free up CH6 or CH7 to be used for other functions when using a receiver 

with more than 5 channels. Both 5 and 6 (FLAPERONAILE-DIFF) are dedicated to the FLAPERON or AILE-DIFF programming. 

>7KLVLVEHQH¿FLDOZLWKIRXUDLOHURQVHUYRVWKDWQHHGWRKDYHWKHLUHQGSRLQWVRUVXEWULPVVHWVHSDUDWHO\&+&+DQG

CH6 are already fully set up to operate as ailerons. Mix CH7 or CH8 (the second aileron servo on the other side) into 

ailerons to function properly.] 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Adjust the second aileron servo output 

from CH6or7 to channels CH6&5.

Allows twin aileron servo operation 

with a 5-channel receiver.

Open the PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to PARAMETER.

Select AILE-2 and change to CH6&5. C to AILE-2. to CH6&5.

Close menu.

Where next? Finish setting up FLAPERON or AILE-DIFF. see Twin Aileron Servos: p. 51.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\
56

Aircraft tail types (ACROGLID):

There are 4 basic tail types in aircraft models:

• Simple. Model uses one elevator servo and one rudder servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness). This is the default. 

• Dual Elevator servos. Model uses 2 elevator servos. see AILVATOR (ACRO) see p. 57. 

• Tail-less model. Model uses 2 wing servos together to create roll and pitch control. see ELEVON(ACROGLID 1A+1F). see p. 56. 

• V-TAIL. Model uses 2 surfaces, at an angle, together to create yaw and pitch control. see V-TAIL (ACROGLID). see p. 58. 

Note: Only one of the three tail-type functions (AILEVATOR, V-TAIL, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. The radio provides a 

ZDUQLQJDQGZLOOQRWDOORZWKHDFWLYDWLRQRIDQRWKHUWDLOW\SHXQWLOWKH¿UVWLVGHDFWLYDWHG$QHUURUPHVVDJHRIOTHER WING 

MIXING IS ON will display. (See the wing type example on page 51.) 

Using ELEVON(ACROGLID 1A+1FXVHGZLWKGHOWDZLQJVÀ\LQJZLQJVDQGRWKHUWDLOOHVVDLUFUDIWWKDWFRPELQHDLOHURQDQG

HOHYDWRU IXQFWLRQV XVLQJWZR VHUYRV RQH RQ HDFK HOHYRQ7KH DLOHURQHOHYDWRU UHVSRQVHV RI HDFK VHUYR FDQ EH DGMXVWHG

independently. This is also popular for ground model use, such as tanks, which drive two motors together for forward, and 

RQHPRWRUIRUZDUGRQHEDFNZDUGIRUWXUQLQJ

Adjustability:

• Requires use of CH1 and CH2.

• Independently adjustable aileron travel allows aileron differential. 

• Independently adjustable elevator travel allows for differences in up vs. down 

travel.

• Separate ELEVON settings for each condition (GLID only)

[Note] When changing the polarity (positive or negative) of a rate, "change rate 

dir?" is displayed as a check. Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and 

canceling the alarm display. (GLID only) 

NOTE: If ELEVON is active, you cannot activate FLAPERON, AILE-DIFF, or 

AILEVATOR. An error message OTHER WING MIXING IS ON displays and you must 

deactivate the last function to activate ELEVON.

127(%HVXUHWRPRYHWKHHOHYDWRUDQGDLOHURQVWLFNVWRIXOOGHÀHFWLRQGXULQJ

setup. If large travels are specified, when the AILERON and ELEVATOR 

STICKS are moved at the same time the controls may bind or run out of travel. 

( For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, please visit www.futabarc.com\faq\. Many other setup examples are also available at this location. )

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate ELEVON.

Adjust aileron down travel to 90% of up 

travel, creating aileron differential.

Open the ELEVON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to ELEVON.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Optional: adjust the up/down travel 

separately for the servos as ailerons. 

(Ex: down to 90%.)

C to AIL1. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

C to AIL2. AILERON STICK.

to 90%.

Optional: adjust the elevator travel of 

each servo. (Ex: right servo elev. travel 

to 98%, left to 105%.)

C to ELE2. to 98%.

C to ELE1. to 105%.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49 and END POINTs: see p. 39. 

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq.html

(GLID 1A+1F)

(ACRO)
57

Dual Elevator Servos (with a rudder) (AILEVATOR) (ACRO): Many models use two elevator servos, plugged in separate 

receiver channels. (Flying wings without a separate aileron control use ELEVON. V-shaped tail models use V-TAIL, p. 58.) 

%HQH¿WV

• Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched 

travel.

• Ease of assembly, not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2

surfaces.

(OHYDWRUVDFWLQJDOVRDVDLOHURQV IRUH[WUHPHVWXQWÀ\LQJRUPRUH UHDOLVWLFMHW

À\LQJRSWLRQDO

• Redundancy, in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision. 

Adjustability:

• CH2 and CH8 only. (With programmable mixing, could utilize CH5 as the 2nd elevator servo. See www.futaba-rc.com\

faq\ for examples.) THROTTLE-NEEDLE uses CH8 and cannot be active simultaneously. 

• Direction of each servo's travel may be reversed in REVERSE or the set percentages may be reversed here. 

• Elevator travels independently adjustable (both directions and percent). 

• Optional action as ailerons (defaults to 50% UHVSRQVH7KLV UHVSRQVHFDQQRW EHDFWLYDWHGGHDFWLYDWHGLQÀLJKW6HWWLQJ

AIL1 and 2 to 0 disables this feature. Note: if you want this, but controlled with a switch, set AIL1 and 2 to 0 here, and use 

2 mixes . AIL-to-ELEV and AIL-to-AUX2OLQNWULPRIIDVVLJQDVZLWFKWRJHWDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPWKHHOHYDWRUVHUYRVZKHQ

the assigned switch is on. See p. 68. 

)RUGHWDLOVRQVHWWLQJXSDFRPSOH[DHUREDWLFSODQHVXFKDVRQHZLWKZLQJVHUYRVIXOOVSDQDLOHURQVÀDSVAIRBRAKE/

crow etc, please visit www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Many other setups are also available.) 

The AILEVATOR mixing function uses one servo on each of the two elevators, and combines the elevator function with the 

aileron function (unless aileron travel is set to 0). For aileron effect, the elevators are raised and lowered opposite of one 

another in conjunction with the ailerons. 

Once AILEVATOR is activated, unless you zero out the aileron values (see below), any time you move your ailerons or any 

programming moves your ailerons (ie. RUDDER-AILERON mixing), the radio automatically commands both elevator servos 

to also operate as ailerons. To deactivate this action, simply set the 2 aileron travel settings to 0 in the AILEVATOR function. 

This way the elevators will work only as elevators. 

,IXVLQJWKHHOHYDWRUVDVDLOHURQVDVZHOOEHVXUHWRPRYHWKHHOHYDWRUDLOHURQVWLFNZKLOHFKHFNLQJWKHVHUYRPRWLRQV,ID

ODUJHWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUHPRYHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXWRIWUDYHO

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate twin elevator servos. 

Deactivate the elevator-acting-asailerons portion of this function.

Note: Depending upon your model's 

geometry, you may need to reverse one

servo or set a negative percentage here.

Open the AILEVATOR function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to AILEVATOR.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Optional: adjust up/down travel when 

operating as ailerons. (Ex: 0.)

C to AIL3. to 0%.

C to AIL4. to 0%.

Optional: adjust total elevator travel 

of each servo. (Ex: right servo elevator 

travel to 98%, left to 96%.)

C to ELE2. to 98%.

C to ELE1. to 96%.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49 and END POINTs: see p. 39.

Set up Twin Aileron Servos: see p. 51.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 63.
58

Using V-TAIL (ACROGLID):

V-TAIL mixing is used with v-tail aircraft so that both elevator and rudder 

functions are combined for the two tail surfaces. Both elevator and rudder travel 

can be adjusted independently on each surface. 

NOTE: If V-TAIL is active, you cannot activate ELEVON or AILEVATOR functions. If one of these functions is active, an error 

message will be displayed and you must deactivate the last function prior to activating ELEVON. See the wing example on 

page 51. 

NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and rudder sticks regularly while checking the servo motions. If a large value of 

WUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUHPRYHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHWKHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXWRIWUDYHO'HFUHDVHWKH

travel until no binding occurs. 

Adjustability:

• Requires use of CH2 and CH4. 

• Independently adjustable travels allow for differences in servo travels. 

• Rudder differential is not available. (To create rudder differential, set RUD1 and 2 to 0. Next, use two programmable 

mixes, RUD-ELE and RUD-RUD, setting different percentages for up and down. These are your new rudder travels. Trim and 

link off, switch assignment null so you can’t accidentally turn off rudder. See PROG.MIX, p. 68.) 

(For details on setting up a complex plane, such as one with a v-tail AND a separate steerable nosewheel, please visit our 

FAQ at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.) 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate V-TAIL.

Adjust left elevator servo to 95% travel 

to match to right servo's travel.

Open the V-TAIL function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to V-TAIL.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

optional: adjust the travels separately 

for the 2 servos as elevators. (Ex: set 

left to 95%.)

C to ELE1. to 95%.

Repeat as necessary for other servos.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32 and SUB-TRIMs: see p. 49.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 62.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.
59

6QDS5ROOVDWWKHÀLFNRIDVZLWFKSNAP-ROLL) (ACRO):

7KLV IXQFWLRQDOORZV \RXWRH[HFXWH VQDS UROOV E\ÀLSSLQJD VZLWFK SURYLGLQJ

the same input every time. It also removes the need to change dual rates on the 

3 channels prior to performing a snap, as SNAP-ROLL always takes the servos to 

the same position, regardless of dual rates, inputs held during the snap, etc. 

Note: Every aircraft snaps differently due to its C.G., control throws, moments, etc. Some models snap without aileron; 

others snap on elevator alone. Most models snap most precisely with a combination of all 3 surfaces. Additionally, rate of 

speed and acceleration when using the snap switch will affect how the model snaps. For information on using gyros with 

airplanes for cleaner precision maneuvers, such as snaps and spins without over rotation, see p. 74. 

Adjustability:

• Travel: Adjust the amount of elevator, aileron and rudder travel automatically applied. 

• Range: -120 to +120 on all 3 channels. Default is 100% of range of all 3 channels. 

• Directions:8SWRVHSDUDWHVQDSVPD\EHVHWXSRQHIRUHDFKRIWKHGLUHFWLRQFKRLFHVXSULJKWGRZQULJKWXSOHIW

GRZQOHIW(DFKVQDSLVIXOO\DGMXVWDEOHUHJDUGLQJWUDYHOVDQGGLUHFWLRQRQHDFKRIWKHFKDQQHOV

Note: for simplicity, the radio refers to snaps that use “UP” or positive elevator as “U” or “UP” snaps. This is more 

commonly referred to as a positive or inside snap. “D” or “DOWN” snaps are more commonly referred to as negative or 

outside snaps. 

• R/U = Right positive R/D = Right negative L/U = Left positive L/D = Left negative snap roll 

• Assignment of the 2 switches (DIR-SW1/2) to change snap directions is fully adjustable and optional. If you wish to have 

only one snap, leave the switches as NULL. (If assigned, SW1 XSGRZQSW2 OHIWULJKW

• Caution: it is critical that you remember if you assigned switches to select the three additional snaps. 

• For example, assign SWITCH A IRU8' VQDS GLUHFWLRQ DQGWKHQ DOVR DVVLJQSWITCH A for elevator dual rates. 

:KLOHÀ\LQJRQHOHYDWRUORZUDWHSWITCH A DOWN) you pull your snap SWITCH. The model will: 

•use the throws set in the snap programming (the low rate elevator has no effect); and 

EHDGRZQQHJDWLYHRXWVLGHVQDSQRWDQXSSRVLWLYHLQVLGHVQDS

•Both of these may come as a great surprise and risk crashing if you are unprepared. 

• Safety Switch (SAFE-MOD): a safety may be set up on your landing gear SWITCH, preventing accidental snap rolls while 

the landing gear is down. The safety switch is turned on and off with the landing gear SWITCH.

• ON: the safety mechanism is activated when the landing gear SWITCH is in the same position when this feature 

is changed to ON. Snap rolls will not be commanded even if the snap roll SWITCH is turned on with the gear 

SWITCH in this position. When the landing gear SWITCH is moved to the opposite position, snap rolls may be 

commanded.

• OFF: activates the safety mechanism in the opposite position from the ON function. 

•FREE: the safety mechanism is completely turned off. Snaps can be commanded regardless of the gear SWITCH

POSITION.

Note: The location of the safety switch always follows channel 5. If channel 5 is reassigned to switch C, for 

example, switch C is now the safety. If channel 5 is nulled or used as the second aileron servo, the safety function 

will not be available. 

• Trainer Safety: SNAP-ROLL is automatically disabled when the trainer function is activated.
60

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate SNAP-ROLL. Adjust elevator 

travel to 55%, rudder travel to 120% in 

WKHULJKWXSVQDS$FWLYDWHSAFE-MOD so 

snaps can not be performed when gear 

is down. 

$GMXVW UXGGHUWUDYHOLQWKHOHIWGRZQ

snap to 105%.

(Note: using negative percents can 

change any of the 4 snap directions. For 

example, change snap 1 to "down" by 

changing the elevator percent to -100%.)

Open the SNAP-ROLL function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to SNAP-ROLL.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to OFF or ON.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: 

elevator to 55%, rudder to 120%.)

C to ELEV. to 55%.

C to RUDD. to 120%.

Optional: Activate SAFE-MOD. [Ex: 

ON when SWITCH E (10CAG) or 

G (10CHG) is down, meaning snap 

function is deactivated when that switch 

is in the down position.]

E or G up. C to SAFE-MODE

to ON.

snap switch. 

Notice MIX reading is still OFF.

E or G down. 

Notice MIX reading changes to ON.

Optional: Assign switches to up/down 

and left/right. (Ex: Change to the left/

down snap and adjust rudder to 105%.)

C to SW1. to A.

C to SW2. to B.

A down B down. 

Repeat steps above to set percentages.

Close menu.

Where next? Set up programmable mixes: see p. 61. 

View additional setups on the internet:www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.
61

MIXES: the backbone of nearly every function

Mixes are special programs within the radio that command one or more channels to act together with input from only one 

source, such as a stick, slider or knob. 

There are a variety of types of mixes. 

Types:

• Linear: Most mixes are linear. A 100% linear mix tells the slave servo to do exactly what the master servo is doing, using 

100% of the slave channel’s range to do so. An example is FLAPERONZKHQDLOHURQVWLFNLVPRYHGWKHÀDSVHUYRLVWROG

to move exactly the same amount. A 50% linear mix would tell the slave servo, for example, to move to 50% of its range 

when the master’s control is moved 100%. (see p. 52.)

• Offset: An OFFSETPL[LVDVSHFLDOW\SHRIOLQHDUPL[:KHQWKHPL[LVWXUQHGRQXVXDOO\DÀLSRIDVZLWFKWKHVODYH

servo is moved a set percent of its range. An example of this is AIRBRAKEPRYLQJÀDSVÀDSHURQVDQGHOHYDWRUDOOWRD

VHWSRVLWLRQDWWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFKVHHS

•Curve: Curve mixes are mostly used in helicopters, but may also be used in airplanes and gliders. An example is 

THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing, where the in-flight needle’s servo is moved, changing the mixture, as the throttle servo is 

moved. (see p. 65.) 

• Delay: Delay mixes are part of a few very special functions that make the servo move to its desired range more slowly. 

THROTTLE DELAY (simulates turbine engines, p. 66) and the elevator delay in AIRBRAKE are two examples of this (see p. 62). 

DELAY in HELI (see p. 103) is another example that slows the servo movement to the trim settings for the other conditions. 

(VVHQWLDOO\HYHU\IHDWXUHLQWKHUDGLR¶VSURJUDPPLQJLVUHDOO\DPL[ZLWKDOODVVLJQPHQWVSURJUDPPLQJVHWXSDQGUHDG\

to use. Additionally, the 10CG ACRO and GLID programs both provide 4 linear and 4 curve fully-programmable mixes 

(HELISURYLGHVOLQHDUDQGFXUYHWKDWDOORZ\RXWRVHWXSVSHFLDOPL[HVWRUHVROYHÀLJKWGLI¿FXOWLHVDFWLYDWHDGGLWLRQDO

functions, etc. 

Let’s look quickly at a few examples that are features we’ve already covered. This may help to clarify the mix types and 

the importance of mixes. 

Additional examples: 

• Exponential is a preprogrammed curve mix that makes the servo's response more (+) or less (-) sensitive around center 

stick (works in conjunction with dual rate, a linear mix that adjusts the total range). see D/R,EXP, p. 42.

•IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT are two OFFSET pre-programmed mixes. These tell the throttle servo, when below a certain point, 

to move toward idle an additional set percentage to help close the carburetor. see p. 40. 

• ELEV-TO-FLAPPL[LQJLV D SUHSURJUDPPHGOLQHDUPL[WRPRYHWKH ÀDSV SURSRUWLRQDOO\WR HOHYDWRU FRQWURO KHOSLQJWKH

model loop even tighter than it can on elevator alone. (see p. 62.)

• THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing is a curve mix (like PROG.MIX 5 to 8IRUSURSHULQÀLJKWQHHGOHVHWXSVHHS

• THROTTLE DELAY mixing is a pre-programmed delay mix that slows down the response of the CH3 servo. (see p. 66.) 

Next, we'll get an in-depth look at some pre-programmed mixes (PL[HVZKRVH FKDQQHOV DUH SUHGH¿QHG E\ )XWDEDIRU

simplicity) we’ve not covered yet, and last, look at the fully-programmable mix types. 
62

ELEV-FLAP mixing (ACROGLID):

ELEV-FLAPPL[LQJLVWKH¿UVWSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[ZH
OOFRYHU7KLVPL[PDNHV

WKH ÀDSV GURS RU ULVH ZKHQHYHUWKHELEVATOR STICK is moved. It is most 

commonly used to make tighter pylon turns or squarer corners in maneuvers. In 

PRVWFDVHVWKHÀDSVGURRSDUHORZHUHGZKHQXSHOHYDWRULVFRPPDQGHG

Adjustability:

• Rate  IXOO XS ÀDSWR  IXOO GRZQ ÀDS ZLWK D GHIDXOW RI 

RQHKDOIRIWKHÀDSUDQJHLVDFKLHYHG when the ELEVATOR STICK is pulled 

to provide full up elevator.)

• Switch: fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up 

LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

*IF you set it to NULL, the mix does not work. (ACRO)

•Range (GLID): The range that mixing does not work near neutral of an elevator 

stick can be set up. 

 Hold the stick to the desired point (upper or lower side) , then press DIAL and 

hold one second to set the range.

•Condition (GLID): Separate ELEV-FLAP settings for each condition can be set.

(ACRO)

(GLID)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate ELEV-FLAP mixing. Adjust flap 

travel to 0%ÀDSVZLWKQHJDWLYHHOHYDWRU

(push) and 45% flaps with positive 

elevator.

Open the ELEV-FLAP function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to ELEV-FLAP.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Adjust the travels as needed. 

(Ex: 0%,to 45%.)

C to RATE.

ELEVATOR STICK. to 0%.

ELEVATOR STICK. to 45%.

Close menu.

Where next? $GMXVWÀDSHURQV
ÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOHFLAPERON): see p. 52.

Set up AIRBRAKEFURZEXWWHUÀ\VHHS

Set up programmable mixes (ex: FLAP-ELEVATOR): see p. 68. 

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.
63

AIRBRAKEBUTTERFLY (crow) mixing (ACROGLID):

Like FLAPERON and AILEVATOR, AIRBRAKE is one function that is really made up of a series of pre-programmed mixes all 

done for you within the radio. AIRBRAKE(often called "crow" or BUTTERFLY - see GLID, p. 80 for details) simultaneously 

PRYHVWKHÀDSVLILQVWDOOHGWZLQDLOHURQVLILQVWDOOHGDQGHOHYDWRUVDQGLVXVXDOO\XVHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWVRUWR

limit increases in airspeed in dives. 

7KLVIXQFWLRQLVRIWHQXVHGHYHQRQPRGHOVZLWKRXWÀDSVDVDQHDV\ZD\WRXVHWKHÀDSHURQVDQGFLAP-ELEVATOR mixing 

together. 

Adjustability:

• Activation: Proportional by moving the THROTTLE STICKRUVHWSRVLWLRQVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFK

• Switch: Mix SWITCH is selectable. 

*Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

•Linear(Inversely proportional to THROTTLE STICK): provides a proportional increase in amount of AIRBRAKE

action as THROTTLE STICK is lowered and assigned switch is on. Provides gradually more AIRBRAKE as you slow 

the engine. Includes selectable stick position where AIRBRAKE begins, gradually increasing to the same setting as the 

THROTTLE STICK is lowered. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly proportional to throttle stick, you will 

need to reverse the THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick direction for all models. See page 38 for 

instructions.

• Offset: Provides AIRBRAKE response immediately upon switch movement, going to a pre-set travel on each active channel 

ZLWKRXWDQ\PHDQVRILQÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQW

• During Airbrake operation, the elevator travel is displayed on the elevator trim display in the Startup screen. 

• Delayed reaction: You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when AIRBRAKEBUTTERFLY is activated 

by setting the delay (delay-ELEVLWHPWR VORZ GRZQWKH HOHYDWRU UHVSRQVH DOORZLQJWKH ÀDSVDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUWR DOO

reach their desired end point together. A setting of 100% slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the 

prescribed distance. (GLID: B.FLY-ELEV function)

• $GMXVWDEOHLQÀLJKWACRO): Using the aileron (when AILE-DIFF or FLAPERONLVDFWLYDWHGDQGHOHYDWRUWULPOHYHULQÀLJKW

can be set to adjust the aileron and elevator settings in your airbrake rather than adjusting the model's actual aileron and 

HOHYDWRUWULP7KLVDOORZVHDV\DGMXVWPHQWIRUDQ\EDOORRQLQJZKLOHLQÀLJKW:KHQWKHDLUEUDNHVZLWFKLVPRYHGWRRII

the trims are again adjusting the normal elevator trim. 

•Channels controlled(OHYDWRUVWZLQDLOHURQVDQGÀDSVPD\EHVHWLQGHSHQGHQWO\LQAIRBRAKE, including set to 0 to 

have no effect. 

• Twin aileron servos: If FLAPERON, ELEVON and AIL-DIFF functions are inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2 settings will have no 

effect. 

• If FLAPERON is active, the travel of the ailerons can be independently adjusted for the servos plugged into CH1 and 

&+7KHÀDSFKRLFHKDVQRHIIHFWRQWKHÀDSHURQV

• If AIL-DIFF is active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted. 

• Normally both ailerons are raised equally in AIRBRAKE, and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when 

the ailerons rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique 

characteristics of the model. 

Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in AIRBRAKEBUTTERFLY. Along with creating an 

enormous amount of drag (desireble for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where 

the ailerons are, and cncourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops", 

FRQVLGHUUDLVLQJWKHDLOHURQVDQGGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVLQVWHDGDVVKRZQLQWKHGLDJUDPDERYH

(ACRO) (GLID)
64

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate AIRBRAKE on a FLAPERON.

model. Adjust the flaperon travel to 

75%,with negative elevator (push) of 

25%.

&RQ¿UPFLAPERON is active. see FLAPERON instructions.

Open the AIRBRAKE function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to AIRBRAKE.

Activate the function. Switch C in up position.

C to MIX. to OFF.

Adjust the travels as needed. 

(Ex:Ailerons each 75%, Elevator -25%.)

C to AIL1. to 75%.

C to ELEV. to -25%.

C to AIL2. to 75%.

Optional: delay how quickly the 

elevator servo responds.

C to delay-ELEV. to 25%.

Optional: change the mixing from full 

amount upon switch to proportional to 

the THROTTLE STICK's proximity to 

idle.

C to MODE. to Linear (0%).

THROTTLE STICK to desired 0

point.

for 1 sec, until beeps 

(display changes if new setting is different from prior 

setting).

Close menu.

Where next? $GMXVWÀDSHURQV
WRWDOÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOHFLAPERON): see p. 52.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mixing: see p. 62.

Set up programmable mixes, for example, FLAP-ELEVATOR: see p. 67. 

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.

• Twin elevator servos:

• If AILEVATOR is active, the AIL1 and AIL2 settings still only affect FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF servos, NOT the elevator servos. 

(they would have the AIL3 and AIL4 settings.)
65

THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing (ACROHELI):

THROTTLE-NEEDLELVDSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[WKDWDXWRPDWLFDOO\PRYHVDQLQÀLJKWPL[WXUHVHUYR&+LQUHVSRQVHWRWKH

THROTTLE STICK inputs for perfect engine tuning at all throttle settings. This function is particularly popular with 

FRQWHVW SLORWV ZKR À\LQ DODUJH YDULHW\ RIORFDWLRQV QHHGLQJUHJXODU HQJLQHWXQLQJ DGMXVWPHQWV DQG UHTXLULQJ SHUIHFW

HQJLQHUHVSRQVHDWDOOWLPHVDQGLQDOOPDQHXYHUV$OVRSRSXODUWRPLQLPL]HÀRRGLQJDWLGOHRILQYHUWHGHQJLQHLQVWDOODWLRQV

or installations with a high tank position. Not needed for fuel injection engines, which do this automatically. 

Adjustability:

• Five-point curve allows adjustment of engine mixture at varied throttle settings. 

7KHLQÀLJKWPL[WXUHVHUYRPXVWFRQQHFWWRUHFHLYHU&+

,QÀLJKWPL[WXUHVHUYRPD\DOVREHXVHGDVDVHFRQGVHUYRIRUWXQLQJDWZLQ

7KURWWOHFXWIHDWXUHDOVRPRYHVWKHLQÀLJKWQHHGOHVHUYR

• The CH8 knob adjusts the high throttle mixture (may be deactivated. see AUX-CH).

• Because both use CH8, this function cannot be used simultaneously with AILEVATOR.

• An acceleration (ACCE) function (ACRO only) helps the engine compensate for sudden, large amounts of throttle input by 

making the mixture suddenly richer, then easing it back to the proper adjustment for that throttle setting. This function 

UHTXLUHVVRPHDGMXVWPHQWWREHVW¿W\RXUHQJLQHDQG\RXUÀ\LQJVW\OH$GMXVWHQJLQH¶VUHVSRQVHXQWLOQRKHVLWDWLRQRFFXUV

on rapid throttle input. 

• Separate curves are available (HELI only) for normal, idle-ups 1 and 2 combined, and idle-up 3. Immediately below MIX

the radio displays the curve you are editing; ex: >NORML; and then which condition is currently active by your switches 

ex: (ID1/2). Note that you can edit the mix for a different condition without being in that condition, to allow editing 

without having to shut off the helicopter’s engine every time. Be sure you are editing the proper curve by checking the 

name after the > and not the one in parentheses. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing.

Adjust the points as follows to resolve 

a slight lean midrange problem:

1: 40%

2: 45%

3: 65%

4: 55%

5: 40%

Open the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to page 2.

C to THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

HELI only. Select the condition to edit. C to MIX. to ACT. as needed. 

Adjust the travels as needed to match 

your engine by slowly moving the stick 

to each of the 5 points, then adjusting 

the percentage at that point until the 

engine is properly tuned.

C to POINT-.

THROTTLE STICK to POINT1.

to 40%.

until POINT 2 is highlighted. 

to 45%.

to POINT 3. to 65%.

to POINT 4. to 55%.

to POINT 5. to 40%

(ACRO) (HELI)
66

Throttle delay function THR-DELAY (ACRO):

The THR-DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle servo to 

simulate the slow response of a turbine engine. A 40% delay setting corresponds 

to about a one-second delay, while a 100% delay takes about eight seconds to 

respond. For helicopters, see DELAYS, p. 103. 

This function may also be used to create a “slowed servo” on a channel other than throttle. This is accomplished by 

plugging the desired servo (Ex: gear doors) into CH3 (THR), throttle into an auxiliary channel such as 8, and then using 

VRPHFUHDWLYHPL[HV3OHDVHVHHRXU)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVDUHDDWZZZIXWDEDUFFRP?IDT?IRUWKLVVSHFL¿FH[DPSOH

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate THR-DELAY for a ducted-fan 

replica of a turbine-powered aircraft. 

Slow the servo response byone second.

Open the THR-DELAY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to page 2.

C to THR-DELAY.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Adjust the RATE to match the desired 

servo speed. (Ex: 40%.)

C to RATE. to 40%.

Close menu.

Where next? Set up THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing: see p. 65.

Adjust throttle’s END POINT: see p. 39.

Adjust throttle exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 57.

Set up programmable mixes, for example, RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 68.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

ACRO only. Optional: increase mixture 

when throttle is applied rapidlyACCE.(see above for details.)

C to ACCE.

THROTTLE STICK to idle.

THROTTLE STICK full open 

quickly.

as needed.

HELI o n l y : s e t c u r v e s f o r o t h e r 

conditions.

C to condition name.

to next condition to edit.

Repeat above steps as needed.

Close menu.
67

Throttle curve (THR-CURVE)(ACRO):

This function adjust the throttle operation curve for optimum engine response to 

throttle stick movement.

NOTE: If the throttle EXP function is activated, you can not use THR-CURVE 

function simultaneously.

Adjustability:

• Separate curves for each switch position are available.

• Moving and deleting the curve point: The curve point (-stk-) can be moved to the left or right by turning the DIAL (up to 

LQIURQWRIWKHDGMRLQLQJSRLQWDQGGHOHWHGUHWXUQHGE\SUHVVLQJWKHDIAL for one second alternately. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Base point: Adjust base point of throttle 

curve until engine idles reliably.

-out-: output, servo position.

-stk-: curve point, stick position.

Open the THR-CURVE function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to THR-CURVE.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ON.

$GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW C to point 1 (-out-). to desired 

throttle servo position. 

Optional: Assign the switch. C to SW. to desired switch. 

Optional: Move the curve point.

(Ex: point 3)

C to point 3 (-stk-). to desired 

curve point to move to left or right.

Optional: Delete the curve point. 

And return the curve point.

(Ex: point 3)

C to point 3 (-stk-). for one 

second to delete the curve point.

C to point 3 (-stk-). for one 

second to return.

Next point: Adjust the next point. Repeat as needed.

Close.
68

LINEAR PROGRAMMABLE MIXES (PROG.MIX1-4):

Sample reasons to use linear programmable mixes: 

• To correct bad tendencies of the aircraft (such as rolling in response to rudder input). 

• To operate 2 or more servos for a single axis (such as two rudder servos). 

7RDXWRPDWLFDOO\FRUUHFWIRUDSDUWLFXODUDFWLRQVXFKDVORZHULQJHOHYDWRUZKHQÀDSVDUHORZHUHG

7RRSHUDWHDVHFRQGFKDQQHOLQUHVSRQVHWRPRYHPHQWLQD¿UVWFKDQQHOVXFKDVLQFUHDVLQJWKHDPRXQWRIVPRNHRLOLQ

response to more throttle application, but only when the smoke switch is active). 

7RWXUQRIIUHVSRQVHRIDSULPDU\FRQWUROLQFHUWDLQFLUFXPVWDQFHVVXFKDVVLPXODWLQJRQHHQJLQHÀDPLQJRXWRQDWZLQ

or throttle-assisted rudder turns, also with a twin). 

Adjustability:

• Defaults: The 4 programmable mixes default to the most frequently used mixes for simplicity. If you want to use one of 

these mixes, simply select that mix number so that the master and slave servos are already selected for you. 

• PROG.MIX1 aileron-to-rudder for coordinated turns

• PROG.MIX2HOHYDWRUWRÀDSIRUWLJKWHUORRSVHELI mixes default to elev-to-pitch.) 

• PROG.MIX3ÀDSWRHOHYDWRUWRFRPSHQVDWHSLWFKLQJZLWKÀDSVHELI mixes default to pitch-to-elev.)

• PROG.MIX4 throttle-to-rudder ground handling compensation 

•Channels available to mix: All four mixes may use any combination of CH1-8. (CH9-10 are not proportional and cannot 

be mixed.) Offset and dials may also be set to the master channels. (see below.) 

•Master: the controlling channel. The channel whose movement is followed by the slave channel. 

•Another channel: Most mixes follow a control channel. (Ex: rudder-to-ailerons, 25%, no switch, corrects roll 

coupling.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

RUDD AILE ON OFF ANY NULL 25% 0

•Offset as master: To create an OFFSETPL[VHWWKHPDVWHUDV2)67 ([PRYHÀDSHURQVDVÀDSVRIWKHLUWRWDO

throw when SWITCH C is in down position.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

OFST FLAP ON 1$ C DOWN 20% 0

• Dial as master: To directly effect one servo’s position by moving a dial, set the master as the desired dial. 

(Ex: create a second throttle trim on left slider.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

VR(D) THRO OFF 1$ ANY NULL 5% 0

•Slave: the controlled channel. The channel that is moved automatically in response to the movement of the master 

channel. The second channel in a mix’s name (i.e. aileron-to-rudder). 

•Link: link this programmable mix with other mixes. 

Ex: PMIX FLAP-ELEVATORPL[LQJWRFRUUHFWIRUEDOORRQLQJZKHQÀDSVDUHORZHUHGEXWPRGHOKDVD9WDLO:LWKRXWLINK,

Your 10CG contains four separate linear programmable mixes. (Note that mixer 

#5-8’s mixing RATEs are set with a 5-point curve. HELI has mixer #5-6's mixing. 

see CURVE MIXES, p. 71.) 

There are a variety of reasons you might want to use these mixes. A few are 

listed here. All of the adjustable parameters are listed below, but don’t let them 

VFDUH\RX)RU\RXU¿UVW IHZWLPHVH[SHULPHQWLQJZLWKPL[HVMXVWWXUQRQWKH

default mixes, adjust them how you think they need to be, then use the servo 

screen to check and see if you were correct. As with all functions, a sample 

setup follows, step by step, to assist you. 
69

WKLVPL[RQO\PRYHV&+HOHYDWRUZKHQÀDSLVFRPPDQGHGUHVXOWLQJLQDGDQJHURXVFRPELQDWLRQRI\DZDQGUROO:LWK

LINK ON, mixing is applied to both CH2 and CH4. 

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

FLAP ELEV ON OFF ANY NULL 5% 0

•Trim: master’s trim affects slave. Not displayed if master is not CH 1-4, because 5-9 have no trim. Ex: two rudder servos. 

With TRIM OFF, rudder trim would bind the two servos. TRIM ON resolves this. 

• On/off choices:

• SWITCH: Any of the positions of any of the 8 switches may be used to activate a mix. Up&Cntr, Cntr&Dn options 

allow the mix to be ON in 2 of the 3 positions of a 3-position SWITCH.

• NULL: No SWITCH can turn this mix OFF. This mix is active at all times. 

• LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

• STk-THR7XUQHGRQRIIE\THROTTLE STICKPRYHPHQW7ULJJHUSRLQWGLUHFWLRQDUHVHOHFWDEOH([OFST-to-(gear

doors) mix to open gear doors at idle, which is only active if throttle is below half.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

OFST AUX2 OFF NO STK-THR Stick at 1/2,

for 1 sec.

100% 0

• Rate: the percentage of the slave’s range it will move upon maximum input from the master channel. Ex: RUDDERAILERONPL[$LOUDQJH  ́:KHQUXGGHULVPRYHGIXOOULJKWDLOHURQVPRYH ́

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

RUDD AILE OFF OFF ANY NULL 50% 0

• Offset: Offsets the slave’s center relative to the master. Ex: Smoke valve opens wider per throttle servo position when 

smoke SWITCH is ON. Smoke servo’s neutral is moved down from THROTTLE STICK center to the bottom.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET 

THRO AUX2 OFF OFF E DOWN 100% 100%
70

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a FLAP-ELEV mix:

ON when SWITCH C is in the down 

position.

1RHOHYDWRUPRYHPHQWZKHQÀDSVPRYH

up (spoilers), 

5% elevator movement when flaps 

move down, 

LINK should be ON if model has twin 

elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK

remains OFF.

(Flap has no trim lever, so TRIM is not 

an option.)

Open an unused programmable mix.

(Ex: use PROG.MIX3 since it is already 

set-up for FLAP-ELEVATOR.)

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to PROG.MIX-.

C to 3 >.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ON.

Choose master and slave channels.

(Ex: no need to change MASTER/SLAVE.)

already CH6

already CH2

Optional: set Master as OFST or VR(A-E).

See above for details.

C to MASTER. to desired choice.

Set LINK and TRIM as needed.

(Ex: leave LINK OFF, TRIM not available.)

Assign SWITCH and position.

(Ex: change from E to C, DOWN.)

C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to DOWN.

Optional: set switch to STk-THR to 

activate mix with THROTTLE STICK.

(See above for details.)

C to SW. to STk-THR.

C to POSI.

THROTTLE STICK to desired 

point.

for 1 second to set.

Optional: set switch position to NULL.

Makes mix active at all times. Not 

compatible with STk-THR.

C to POSI. to NULL.

Set rates. (Ex: Lo=0%, Hi=5%.) C to RATE.

VR(A) past center. Leave at 0%.

VR(A) past center. to 5%.

Set OFFSET, if needed. (Ex: 0.) C to OFFSET. Leave at 0%.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 39.

6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up additional programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 68.

View numerous additional mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

Other Examples: 

• RUD-ELEV (ACROGLID) mix: Compensate for pitching up or down when rudder is applied. 

• AIL-RUD mix (ACRO): Coordinate turns by applying rudder automatically with aileron input. All model types. 

• ELEV-PIT (HELI) mix: compensate for the loss of lift of tilting the model. 
71

CURVE PROGRAMMABLE MIXES (PROG.MIX5-8)(HELI: PROG.MIX5-6 ):

Your 10CG’s ACROGLID programs contain four separate curve programmable mixes. HELI contains two. There are a variety 

RIUHDVRQV\RXPLJKWZDQWFXUYHPL[HV)RUH[DPSOHZKHQDOLQHDUPL[GRHVQ¶W¿W\RXUQHHGVDORQJWKHZKROHUDQJH2QH

pre-programmed curve mix is the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function. This curve is adjustable at 5 points, allowing you to adjust 

the motor’s tuning at 5 points along its RPM range. 

One programmable curve mix defaults to RUDDER-AILERON. A linear mix that keeps the model from rolling in knife-edge is 

SUREDEO\WRRPXFKDLOHURQZKHQUXGGHULVDSSOLHGLQOHYHOÀLJKW&UHDWHDFXUYHPL[DQGVHWDOOSRLQWVWRPDWFKWKHOLQHDU

mix. Inhibit the linear mix, then adjust the curve to get the right response all along the rudder channel’s travel. 

$GMXVWDELOLW\IRUGHWDLOHGGH¿QLWLRQVVHH/LQHDU3URJUDPPDEOH0L[HVDQG*ORVVDU\

• ACROGLID Defaults: The 4 programmable curve mixes default to the most frequent choices, but can be set to any channel. 

• PROG.MIX5 rudder-to-aileron for roll coupling compensation (GLID mixes default to aileron-to-elev.) 

• PROG.MIX6 rudder-to-aileron for roll coupling compensation (GLID mixes default to aileron-to-elev.) 

• PROG.MIX7 rudder-to-elevator for pitch coupling compensation (GLID mixes default to elevator-to-airbrake.) 

• PROG.MIX8 rudder-to-elevator for pitch coupling compensation (GLID mixes default to elevator-to-airbrake.) 

• HELI Defaults:

• PROG.MIX5 aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns 

• PROG.MIX6 aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns 

• Master: The controlling channel can only be a channel. Cannot be OFFSET or dial. 

• Trim: not available in curve mixes. 

• Offset: not available in curve mixes. 
72

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a RUDD-ELEV curve mix on a 

model that pitches down severely at 

full rudder and not at all with minimal 

rudder input, and pitches worse on right 

rudder than left:

Point 1: 25%

Point 2: 8%

Point 3: 0%

Point 4: 10%

Point 5: 28%

ON when SWITCH C is down.

LINK should be ON if model has twin 

elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK

remains OFF.

(Note that point 3 is 0%. Otherwise,the 

elevator would be retrimmed when the 

mix is active and no rudder input is 

given.)

Open an unused curve programmable 

mix. (Ex: use PROG.MIX7 since it is 

already set-up for RUDDER-ELEV.)

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to PROG.MIX-.

C to 7 >.

Activate the function. to page 2.

C to MIX. to ON.

Choose master and slave channels.

(Ex: do not change MAS or SLV).

already RUDD

already ELEV

Set LINK as needed. (Ex: off)

Assign SWITCH and position.

(Ex: change from F to C, DOWN.)

C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to DOWN.

Optional: set switch to STk-THR to 

activate mix with THROTTLE STICK.

(See above for details.)

C to SW. to STk-THR.

C to POSI.

THROTTLE STICK to desired 

point.

for 1 second to set.

Optional: set switch position to NULL.

Makes mix active at all times. Not 

compatible with STk-THR.

C to POSI. to NULL.

Set desired percent at the stick points. 

(Ex: listed at left.)

to page 1. 

C to POINT-1. to 25%.

Repeat for points 2-5.

Close menu.

Where next? Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 39.

Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 57.

Set up linear programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-to-Aux2(twin rudder servos):see p. 

68, or additional curve mix, ex: RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 71.

View numerous mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\
73

GYA gyro mixing 

GYA series gyros: 

GYA series gyros are a high performance, compact, and light weight AVCS gyro developed for model airplane. Integrated 

sensor and control circuit make it easy to mount. 

• GYA350: for airplane aileron, elevator, or rudder. 

• GYA351: for airplane ailerons, especially two servos such as when using FLAPERON.

• GYA352: for airplane aileron, elevator, or rudder control. Two of these surfaces (axis) can be controlled by GYA352.

GYA series gyro operation modes: 

The GYA gyros have two operations modes: AVCS mode and Normal mode. 

• Normal mode: This mode performs general proportional control operation. For instance, it controls the gyro so that 

changes are countered when the attitude of the aircraft is changed by cross-wind, etc. 

• AVCS mode: This mode performs both proportional and integrated control operation. The difference between Normal 

mode and AVCS mode operation is that whereas the Normal mode only counters changes in attitude, the AVCS mode 

returns to the original controlled variable simultaneously with countering changes in attitude. For example, during knife 

HGJHÀ\LQJDLOHURQDQGHOHYDWRUFRPELQLQJ UXGGHULQSXWLVQRUPDOO\QHFHVVDU\EXWLQWKH$9&6PRGHDGGLQJ UXGGHU

input is performed automatically by the gyro.

Adjustability:

• Plug the gyro's sensitivity adjustment to channel 5, 7, or 8 of the receiver. 

(selectable)

• Full switch assignability (SWITCH A-H)

• Each rate setting may be set from 0 to NOR100% or AVC100% gain. 

NOR: Normal mode gain. AVC: AVCS mode gain 

• Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness. 

• MIX-1,2: Two surfaces' sensitivity can be adjusted independently.

Gyro gain adjustment: 

• When the servo hunts, the gyro gain is too high. Lower the gain until the hunting stops. 

7KH J\UR ZLOO GLVSOD\ EHVW SHUIRUPDQFH DW D JDLQMXVW EHIRUH KXQWLQJ RFFXUV 3HUIRUP DGMXVWLQJ E\ À\LQJWKH DLUFUDIW

repeatedly. 

Precautions: 

• When taking off and landing, always switch to the Normal mode. Taking off and landing in the AVCS mode is dangerous. 

• We recommend that you use the rudder control gyro in the Normal mode. In the AVCS mode, rudder operation is 

necessary when turning because the weathervane effect is lost. Use the gyro in the Normal mode unless you are an expert 

in rudder operation. 

• And we recommend that you also set to off (0%) mode for safety as follows. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a GYA gyro setting. (Ex: MIX-1) Open and activate the GYRO SENSE

function.

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to GYRO SENSE.

Activate the function. C to MIX-1. to ON.

Optional: change switch assignment. 

Ex: select E.

C to SW

to E.

Adjust gyro rates as needed. (Ex:UP 

to NOR70%, CNTR to 0% (off), DOWN to 

AVC70% as starting points.)

C to gyro rate

E up. to NOR 70%.

(0%).

E down. to AVC 70%.

Close menu.
74

Special Additions, Functions, And Added Equipment Commonly Used On Powered Aircraft 

Gyros: -XVW DVWRUTXH URWDWHV DQ DLUFUDIW RQWKH UXQZD\ GXULQJWDNHRII KHOLFRSWHUV VWUXJJOH ZLWKWRUTXHWZLVWLQJWKH

model every time throttle is applied. For many years gyroscopes have been used on model helicopters to control this. In 

competition aerobatics and scale aircraft competition alike, the usefulness of gyros has recently come to light. For in-depth 

information on gyro types, please see p. 106. 

)RUDHUREDWLFVJ\URVRQUXGGHUDQGHOHYDWRU¿[RYHUURWDWLRQRIVQDSVDQGVSLQVDVZHOODVWDLOZDJJLQJLQVWDOOWXUQV)XWDED

offers a twin-axis gyro, GYA-352, that controls two axes with a single gyro.) For 3D aerobatics (below stall speed, such as 

WRUTXHUROOVKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URVRQUXGGHUDQGHOHYDWRUGUDPDWLFDOO\VLPSOLI\WKHVHPDQHXYHUV)RUVFDOHPRGHOV

gyros are frequently used to simplify take-offs and landings by keeping the model straight during throttle application. 

 $OZD\V EH FDUHIXOLI XVLQJ D KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\UR DVLWZLOO FRUUHFW DQ\ FKDQJHLQ \DZWKDWLV QRW FDXVHG E\

PRYHPHQW RIWKH UXGGHU OLNHPDNLQJDWXUQZLWKMXVWDLOHURQDQGHOHYDWRU7\SLFDOO\PRGHOHUV XVH KHDGLQJKROG

$9&6VHWWLQJVRQO\IRUVSHFL¿FPDQHXYHUVVXFKDVWDNHRIIVDQGWRUTXHUROOVWKHQVZLWFKWRQRUPDOPRGHRU2))IRU

WKHUHPDLQGHURIWKHÀLJKWWRDYRLGWKLVULVN

Retracts: Retractable landing gear is often used on scale models for increased realism and on high performance models to 

decrease drag. The gear servo is typically plugged into CH5, which defaults to a 2-position switch for simplicity. 

Mechanical retracts require the use of a specialized non-proportional retract servo. Retract servos go from full travel 

one direction to full travel the other direction, then mechanically hold the gear into the locked position. A regular 

servo used for mechanical retracts will continue to draw full power the entire time, prematurely draining the battery 

and risking crash of your model. End point will not adjust a retract servo. 

Pneumatic (air driven) retracts use a standard servo to control an air valve which directs air into or out of the retract units, 

moving the gear up or down. Pneumatics are easier to install but require added maintenance of the air system. 

Gear Doors: Some scale models with retracts also have separate gear doors to cover the scale gear. For one example of 

how to operate the gear doors separately from the retracts, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. 

Smoke Systems: Many scale and aerobatic models use smoke systems to provide increased realism or a more impressive 

GHPRQVWUDWLRQ7KHUH DUHPDQ\ VPRNH V\VWHPV DYDLODEOH ZLWK YDU\LQJW\SHV RI FRQWURO0RVW XVH D VHUYRWRLQFUHDVH

GHFUHDVHWKHÀRZRIVPRNHÀXLGLQWRWKHVSHFLDOL]HGVPRNHPXIÀHU7KHRLOLVKHDWHGLQWKHPXIÀHUFUHDWLQJVPRNH

It is a good practice to set up a "safety" that shuts off the smoke oil if the throttle is lowered below half-stick. For a detailed 

example of a smoke system setup, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. 

Kill Switches: For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended that an electronic kill switch be installed in all gasolineSRZHUHGDLUFUDIW,QFDVHRIDQ\W\SHRILQÀLJKWSUREOHPVXFKDVSURSIDLOXUHH[KDXVWYLEUDWLQJRIIWKURWWOHVHUYRIDLOXUH

UDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHWKHPRGHOHUFDQVKXWWKHHQJLQHRIITXLFNO\DQGVDIHO\LQÀLJKW$GGLWLRQDOO\)DLO6DIH)6VHWWLQJV

DUHUHFRPPHQGHGWRVKXWWKHHQJLQHRIILQFDVHRIVXI¿FLHQWLQWHUIHUHQFHWRWULJJHUWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJV

Lastly, an electronic kill switch set to "off" prior to the aircraft's power being shut off adds an additional safety should 

someone accidentally turn on the mechanical kill switch on the exterior of the model. 

Bomb Drops, Paratroopers, and other Released Items: Many sport and scale models include one or more of these fun addons. Typically, all are controlled by a simple micro-switch plugged into CH9 or CH10. The switch is assigned in AUX-CH.
75

GLIDER MODEL FUNCTIONS 

Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane (GLID 1A+1F

2A+1F2A+2F setups), and helicopter (HELI setups). The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter. The glider 

BASIC menu includes MOTOR CUT and does not include IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT.

Note that in all cases where ACRO programming labels channel 3 as throttle, GLID programming labels channel 3 as ARB

(airbrake), since airbrakes are normally operated on channel 3 in gliders. This includes STK-THR reading STK-ARB.

GLIDER (GLID(1A+1F)(2A+1F)(2A+2F)) FUNCTIONS . 75 

Table of contents........................................................ 75 

Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider ................ 76 

GLIDER BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS .......................... 78 

MOTOR CUT ................................................................ 79

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY, NAME .......... 30 

PARAMETER Submenu: RESET, MODUL, ATL, AILE-2,

CONTRAST, BACK-LIGHT, USER NAME, LOGIC SW ........ 33

Model type (PARAMETER submenu) ........................... 78

Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38

END POINT .................................................................. 39

'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDOD/R, EXP) .......... 42

TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45

Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH) ............................................................................. 46

TRAINER ..................................................................... 47

TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48

SERVO Display ........................................................... 49

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) ......................... 50 

GLIDER ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ..................... 80 

FLAPERON ................................................................... 52

FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53

Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF) ................................. 54

ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56

ELEVON ....................................................................... 56

V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-4 ............................................. 68

Curve, Prog. mixes 5-8 ............................................. 71

ELEV-FLAP.................................................................... 62

BUTTERFLY (modifyed version of AIRBRAKE) ............. 63

BUTTERFLY................................................................... 87 

AILE/RUDD .................................................................. 81

AILE-FLAP (GLID(2A+2F) only) .................................... 82

SPOILER MIX ............................................................... 83

OFFSETs$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV...................... 84

START DELAY (GLID(1A+1F) only) ................................. 85

CAMBER MIX ............................................................... 85 

CAMBER FLAP .............................................................. 86

Channel 3’s function selection (CONDITION/FUNCTION) 88 
76

GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL (Aileron/Flap/Rudder/Elevator) GLIDER 

This guideline is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, 

and to give you some ideas and direction in how to do even more with this powerful system than you may have already 

considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we’re trying to 

accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and a step-by-step instruction to 

leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model. 

For additional details on utilizing each function, see that function’s section in this manual—the page numbers are indicated 

LQWKH¿UVWFROXPQDVDFRQYHQLHQFHWR\RX

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model’s instructions. Turn on 

transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.

Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control 

throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.

Check servo direction and throws.

Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your 

model. (Ex: GLID 1A+1F.) See p. 78.

[NOTE: This is one of several functions 

that requires confirmation to make a 

change. Only critical changes such as 

a MODEL RESET require additional key 

strokes to accept the change.]

In the BASIC menu, open the PARAMETER 

submenu.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

then C to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

Go to MODEL TYPE. C to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex:GLID(1A+1F).

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH

Close the PARAMETER submenu.

to GLID(1A+1F).

for 1 second.

Are you sure? Displays. WRFRQ¿UP

to return to BASIC menu.

NAME the model.

P. 32.

(Note that you do not need to do 

anything to "save" or store this data.)

In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL 

submenu.

C as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

Go to MODEL NAME. C to NAME.

(1st character of model’s name is highlighted.)

Input aircraft’s name.

Close the MODELsubmenu when done.

WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU

When proper character is displayed, 

C to move to next character and 

repeat.

to return to BASIC menu.

REVERSE servos as needed for proper 

control operation.

P. 38.

In the BASIC menu, open (servo) 

REVERSE.

C to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its 

direction of travel. 

(Ex: reverse rudder servo.)

C to CH4:RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Are you sure? Displays. 

for 1 second.

Repeat as needed.

to return to BASIC menu.
77

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Adjust travels as needed to match 

model’s recommended throws (usually 

listed as high rates).P. 39.

In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT. C to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

Adjust the servos’ end points.

([ÀDSVHUYR

Close the function.

C to FLAP.

VR(A) until travel as desired.

VR(A). Repeat as needed. 

6HW XS GXDOWULSOH UDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO

(D/R,EXP)

P. 42.

(Note that in the middle of the left 

side of the screen is the name of the 

channel and the SWITCH position 

you are adjusting. Two or even three 

rates maybe set per channel by simply 

choosing the desired SWITCH and 

programming percentages with the 

SWITCHLQHDFKRILWVSRVLWLRQV

Choose D/R,EXP. C to D/R,EXP.

to choose D/R,EXP.

Choose the desired control, and set 

the first (Ex: high) rate throws and 

exponential.

C to CH>.

to choose CH>2 (elevator).

A to up position. [Note screen reads ELEV

(UP)]

C to D/R.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

(Normally the same for both directions.)

C to EXP.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

Set the second (low) rate throws and 

exponential.

C to D/R. A to down position.

Repeat above to set low rate.

Optional: change dual rate SWITCH

assignment. Ex: elevator to SWITCH G

with 3 positions.

C to SW. to G.

G to center position.

Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.

0RYHÀDSFRQWURO IURPWKH95$GLDO

to the left slider [VR(D)]. (AUX-CH)

p. 46.

In the BASIC menu, open AUX-CH. C to AUX-CH. to choose AUX-CH.

Choose CH6ÀDS

Change primary control to VR(D).

Change other channels as needed.

C to CH6.

to VR(D).

Repeat as required.

Return to the home screen.

Where next? (Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

TRAINER p. 47.

Multiple wing or tail servos. See wing types and tail types: p. 51, 56.

OFFSETS, BUTTERFLY(AIRBRAKEFURZDQGRWKHUSURJUDPPDEOHPL[HVS

Retractable Gear, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel 

setups: p. 46.

Adjusting SUB-TRIMs to match servo centers: p. 49.
78

$/22.$77+(5$',2
6GLID-SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS STEP BY STEP. 

Those functions which are identical to the ACRO setups are referred directly to those pages.

MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used.

GLIDER TYPES: 

%HIRUHGRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXSDJOLGHURUVDLOSODQH¿UVW\RXPXVWGHFLGHZKLFKMODEL TYPEEHVW¿WV\RXUDLUFUDIW

• ACROIRUVRPHDHUREDWLFVORSHJOLGHUVACRO is a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not. 

• ACRO provides: 

• SNAP-ROLL,

• AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support), 

• AIRBRAKE (a more assignable version of BUTTERFLY).

• For nitro-powered sailplanes: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming. 

• But ACROODFNV SURJUDPPLQJ IRU IXOOVSDQ DLOHURQV DQG VHSDUDWH 2))6(7WULPV IRU HDFK ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ 1RUPDO

Start, Speed, Distance and Landing. 

• GLID(1A+1F): The GLID(1A+1F) MODEL TYPE is intended for sailplanes with one or two aileron servos (or none), and a single 

ÀDS VHUYR RUWZRFRQQHFWHGZLWKD \FRQQHFWRU7KLVTYPE is meant to be a very simplistic version to set up a basic 

JOLGHUZLWKRXWDORWRIDGGHGIHDWXUHV$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOH

• GLID(2A+1F): The GLID(2A+1F) MODEL TYPELVLQWHQGHGIRUVDLOSODQHVZLWKGXDODLOHURQVHUYRVDQGDVLQJOHÀDSVHUYRRU

WZRFRQQHFWHGZLWKD\FRQQHFWRU$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOH7KHVHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFRQWDLQGLIIHUHQWRIIVHW

trims and aileron differentials to make the sailplane perform certain maneuvers more easily.

• GLID(2A+2F): The GLID(2A+2F) MODEL TYPE supports dual flap servos that can also act as ailerons, creating full-span 

DLOHURQVDQGÀDSV$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOH7KHVHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFRQWDLQGLIIHUHQWRIIVHWWULPVDQGDLOHURQ

differentials to make the sailplane perform certain maneuvers more easily.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change model1 is MODEL TYPE to 

GLID(1A+1F).

NOTE: This is one of the several 

functions that the radio requires 

FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory. (Ex: 1) 

On home screen, check model nameand 

number on top left.

If it is not the correct model (Ex: 1), use 

MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to PARAMETER.

Change the MODEL TYPE.

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH

C to TYPE. to GLID(1A+1F).

for one second.

Are you sure?&RQ¿UPDWLRQGLVSOD\V

WRFRQ¿UP

Close.

GLID(1A+1F)

(FLAPERON)

AIL1

FLP2

(CH1)

AIL2

FLP1

(CH6)

AIL1

(CH1)

AIL2

(CH7) FLP

(CH6)

GLID(2A+1F)

AIL1

(CH1)

FLP1

(CH6)

FLP2

(CH5)

AIL2

(CH7)

GLID(2A+2F)
79

Motor cut function (MOTOR CUT) (GLID SURYLGHVDQHDV\ZD\WR VWRSWKHPRWRU E\ÀLSSLQJD VZLWFK UHJDUGOHVV RIWKH

AIRBRAKE STICK position. The servo movement is largest at -30%. 

The switch's location and direction must be chosen. It defaults to NULL to avoid 

accidentally assigning it to a switch, which might result in an unintentional dead 

VWLFNLQÀLJKW

Adjustability:

• RATE range of -30 to +30. The servo movement at 0% is maximum slow position of AIRBRAKE STICK. The servo 

movement is largest at -30%. 

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always off) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate 

positions of the same SWITCH.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Decrease the rate to stop the motor 

ZLWKWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFK1RWHWKDW\RX

MUST assign a switch. The default is 

NULL.)

Open BASIC menu, then open THR-CUT

function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to THR-CUT.

Activate the function. Choose desired 

switch and the position which activates 

the function.

C to MIX. to OFF or ON.

C to SW. to desired switch.

C to POSI. to desired position.

C to RATE. until turns off.

Close.

Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDOD/R,EXP): see p. 42.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57.

*Also LOGIC SW(Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.
80

GLIDER ADVANCE MENU 

Varied wing types and tail types (twin aileron servos, twin elevator servos, elevon, v-tail, etc). See p. 51-58 for basic 

information.

•FLAPERON (GLID 1A+1FRQO\DLOHURQVHUYRVRSHUDWHLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVDVDLOHURQVDQGVDPHGLUHFWLRQDVÀDSV6HH

p. 45. 

• CAMBER FLAPSURYLGHVFDPEHUPRYHPHQWRUWULPPLQJRIÀDSV6HHS

• For sailplanes, this function is also used as wing camber. The amount depends on the model, but usually a small 

amount (less than 10%) is preferred, since too much camber produces excess drag. Don’t use more than about 

 ́WUDYHO XS RU GRZQ IRU JOLGHU FDPEHU 6RPH DLUIRLOV VXFK DVWKH5* VKRXOG EH ÀRZQZLWK12 UHÀH[

camber. Be sure to consult your model’s manual for guidelines. 

• Note that even though you may make CAMBER FLAP active while using AILE-DIFF, it will not have any effect. The 

21/<IXQFWLRQWKDWDOORZVFRQWURORIWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWKHAILE-DIFFFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVDLUEUDNHEXWWHUÀ\

•Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF): allows twin aileron servos to provide differential down travel from up travel. See p. 

54.

• Using Twin Aileron Servos with FLAPERON and AILE-DIFF. See AIL-2, p. 55. 

• ELEVONIRUÀ\LQJZLQJV6HHS

• V-TAIL: for models with 2 servos operating together to create roll and pitch control. See p. 58. 

• AILEVATOR: not available in GLID model types. 

Mixes:

• Linear Programmable mixes (PROG.MIX1-4): fully assignable programmable mixes with a linear response. see p. 68. 

•Curved Programmable mixes (PROG.MIX5-8): fully assignable programmable mixes with a curved response. See p. 

71.

• ELEV-FLAPSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[FUHDWHVHOHYDWRUPRYHPHQWIURPWKHLQERDUGÀDSVDVZHOODVHOHYDWRUV6HHS

• BUTTERFLY: Often called crow, BUTTERFLY is the glider version of AIRBRAKE. (BUTTERFLY does not have the option to 

activate it solely from a switch, and its activation switch. It always provides progressively more BUTTERFLY as the 

CHANNEL 3 (THROTTLE) STICK is lowered, or raised if used THR-REV, p.38.) See AIRBRAKE, p. 63. 

Full Span Mixing: Flap-to-Aileron and Aileron-to-Flap

• CAMBER-MIXAILE-FLAP7KLV SUHSURJUDPPHGPL[LV XVHGWR FUHDWH IXOO VSDQ ÀDSDLOHURQ DFWLRQ RQ D JOLGHU ZLWK 

ZLQJVHUYRV7KLVFKDQJHVWKHFDPEHURYHUWKHHQWLUHZLQJZKLFKSURGXFHVOHVVGUDJWKDQMXVWGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVE\

themselves.

NOTE: When you have ELEV-FLAP mixing also, the trailing edge droops with the elevators, increasing pitch response. 
81

AILERUDD(GLID):

Adjustability:

• RATE range of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in opposite rudder (aileron) action from aileron (rudder). 

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate 

positions of the same SWITCH.

•Condition: The separate AILERUDDVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQFDQEHVHW

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

([58''ĺ$,/(  QR VZLWFK

corrects roll coupling.

Open AILERUDD mix submenu. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to AILERUDD.

Select the mixing mode. C to MODE. to RUDDĺAILE

Activate the function. C to MIX to ON.

Set the rate. (Ex: 100% each way) C to FLP1.

RUDDER STICK. to +25%.

RUDDER STICK. to +25%.

Repeat as needed.

Close.

Where next? ELEV-FLAP mixing. See p. 62.

BUTTERFLY. See p. 63.

Use a mix to OFFSETWKHÀDSVDVHWGLVWDQFHRQDVSHFL¿HGVZLWFKVHHS

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

You can select a pre-programed mix which is used to mix the rudders with 

aileron operation or the ailerons with rudder operation.

Aileron-to-rudder mix (AILEĺRUDD): automatically creates a "coordinated turn". 

Rudder -to-aileron mix (RUDDĺAILE): used to counterract undesirable roll (roll 

coupling) that happens with rudder input, especially in knife-edge.
82

AILE-FLAP(GLID 2A+2F only): 

Adjustability:

• RATEUDQJHRIWR1HJDWLYHVHWWLQJZRXOGUHVXOWLQRSSRVLWHDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPÀDSV

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate 

positions of the same SWITCH.

•Condition: The separate AILE-FLAPVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQFDQEHVHW

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Turn on AILE-FLAP mixing. Set rate 

to100% for maximum possible flap 

travel with ailerons. Assign to SWITCH

C center.

Open AILE-FLAP submenu. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to AILE-FLAP.

Activate the function. C to MIX to ON.

Set the rate. (Ex: 100% each way) C to FLP1.

AILERON STICK. to +100%.

AILERON STICK. to +100%.

Repeat above to set FLP2.

Assign the SWITCH and position. C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to CENTER.

Close.

Where next? ELEV-FLAP mixing. See p. 62.

BUTTERFLY. See p. 63.

Use a mix to OFFSETWKHÀDSVDVHWGLVWDQFHRQDVSHFL¿HGVZLWFKVHHS

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span aileron action on a glider 

with 4wing servos. This increases the roll rate and decreases induced drag. 

)RUQRUPDOÀ\LQJDYDOXHRIDERXWLVRIWHQXVHG)RUVORSHUDFLQJRU)%

models in speed runs, you may wish to use a larger value approaching 100%. 
83

SPOILER MIX (GLIDPRYHVWKHVSRLOHUVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFKDQGLVXVHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWV$QGSPOILER

MIX works linking with BUTTERFLY function.

Adjustability:

• Position: -100% to +100%, with a default of -50% (off), +50% (on)

•Channel: Spoiler 1: ch8, 5 or 3 (ch8 or 3*), Spoiler 2: NULL, ch5 or 3 (NULL or ch3*) *GLID (2A+2F) mode

• Elevator setting: Rate: -100% to +100%, Delay: 0% to 100%

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

2-servo spoiler mode. 

Adjust the spoiler servo position to 

60%.

Open the SPOILER MIX function and 

move to 2nd page.

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to SPOILER MIX.

to 2nd page.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ON.

Assign the SPO2-CH. (Ex: CH3) C to SPO2-CH. to CH3.

Adjust the spoiler servo position. 

(Ex: SPO1SPO2=+55% to +60%)

C to +50%. (SPO1) to +60%.

C to +50%. (SPO2) to +60%.

Optional: Set the elevator rate. 

(EX: 10%)

C to rate-ELE. to 10%.

Optional: Set the delay. (EX: 25%) C to dly-ELE. to 25%.

Close menu.

Where next? Set up BUTTERFLY mixing: see p. 87.
84

OFFSETsDGGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOHVSHFL¿FDOO\IRUVDLOSODQHV

Unnecessary fuselage motion is generated when there are sudden changes in the servo position. Variations in the operating 

time between channels can be suppressed by using the delay function (-dly-).

NOTE: The same delay amount for elevator and rudder is recommended when using V-tail function.

7KH&*SURYLGHVRIIVHWWULPVWRDOORZWKHPRGHOHUDGGLWLRQDOVHWXSVDORQJZLWKWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQNORMAL,

START, SPEED, DISTANCE and LANDING) These offset trims have same setting abilities basically except the switch and dial 

assignment. For an example of trim settings, please see the following: 

Adjustability:

6HSDUDWHDGMXVWPHQWVIRUHDFKDLOHURQHOHYDWRUUXGGHUDQGÀDSVHUYRIRUHDFK

condition.

• SWITCH G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) is programmed for NORMAL, START, and 

SPEED trims. SWITCH C is programmed for DISTANCE and LANDING trims. The 

VZLWFKSRVLWLRQDVVLJQPHQWLVDGMXVWDEOHCONDITION/FUNCTION)

• TRIM item (Digital trim operation mode): 

NORM: normal trim operation mode, 

MIX: offset rate trim operation mode while mixing is on. 

• Optional assignable knob (CAMBER MIX) to allow trimming in flight of the 

DLOHURQDQGÀDSDFWLRQRIHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

*During OFFSET operation, the aileron and elevator travels are displayed on each 

trim display in the Startup screen. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a START to gain maximum 

possible lift on launch. 

Each Aileron: 50%.

Each Flap: 100%.

Elevator: -5% to compensate.

SWITCH (10CAG=G, 10CHG=E.)

Note: switch is assignable. (CONDITION)

KNOB(null)

Note: knob is assignable. (CAMBER MIX)

Open OFFSET function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to OFFSET.

Switch to the START condition. G (10CA) or E (10CH) from 

NORMAL to START.

Set the rates. (Ex: AIL1 and 2, 50%, FLP1

and 2, 100%, ELEV -5%.)

C to AIL1. to +50%.

C to AIL2. to +50%.

Repeat for, FLP1 and 2, ELEV.

Close the function.

Where next? View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

These additional flight conditions contain different offset trims to make the 

saiplane perform certain maneuvers more easily. Aileron differential functions 

may be set to provide separate rates per condition selected. 

Prior to setting up OFFSET, you must activate the conditions and assign the 

switches in the CONDITION/FUNCTION.
85

Camber Mixing (CAMBER MIX)(GLID):

This function adjusts the mixing rate of camber operation which operates the 

ZLQJ FDPEHU DLOHURQV DQG ÀDSVLQWKH QHJDWLYH DQG SRVLWLYH GLUHFWLRQV7KH

DLOHURQÀDSDQGHOHYDWRUUDWHVFDQDOVREHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\DQGDWWLWXGH

changes caused by camber operation can be corrected.

Also the operation reference point of camber control can be offset. (PRE)

NOTE: Camber control is not assigned at default.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Ex: Set the mixing amount for aileron 

to 40%, camber control to VR(E),

reference point to desired point.

Open the CAMBER MIX function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to CAMBER MIX.

Choose desired slider. C to VR. to VR(E).

Adjust the mixing amount for AILE.

(Ex: adjust to 40%.)

C to AILE. VR(E). to 40%.

 VR(E). to 40%.

Set the reference point. C to PRE. or VR(E) to 

desired point. for one second.

Close menu.

Adjustability:

• Rate: -100% to +100%, with a default of +30%

• Reference point (PRE): The operation reference point of camber control can be offset. -100% to +100%, with a default of 0%.

START DELAY (GLID 1A+1F only):

START DELAY automatically switches the offset trims (OFFSET) from the START

condition's trims to the normal condition's trims after the delay time (max.10sec.). 

This delay time set by the -dly- item when activating the START condition. (It is 

convenient for hand launch glider.)

NOTE: The same delay amount for elevator and rudder is recommended when 

using V-tail function.

Adjustability:

• Delay time (-dly-) range of 0 to 100%. The delay time is 10 second at 100%.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Ex: delay time=5 second. Open ADVANCE menu, then open START 

DELAY function.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to START DELAY.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to OFF or ON.

Set the delay time. 

(Ex: 50% each surface)

C to ELEV. to 5O%.

C to RUDD. to 5O%.

Repeat as needed.

Close.
86

Flap Setting (CAMBER FLAP)(GLID):

CAMBER FLAP assigns the primary flap control [defaults to VR(A)] to allow 

LQÀLJKWWULPPLQJWKHÀDSV

7KH XSGRZQWUDYHO RI HDFK IODS FDPEHU IODSVFLP12) can be adjusted 

LQGHSHQGHQWO\$OVRWKHFHQWHUSRVLWLRQRIWKHÀDSVHUYRFDQEHRIIVHW

NOTE: If FLAP-TRIM is activated, you can not use CAMBER FLAP function 

simultaneously.

[Note] When changing the polarity of a rate, "change rate dir?" is displayed for a check. Please set up after 

pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling an alarm display. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Ex: Set the maximum travel of 35% of 

WKHWRWDOÀDSWUDYHO

Open the CAMBER FLAP function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to CAMBER FLAP.

$ GM X VW W KH X S G RZ Q W ULP DP R X QW

separately. 

(Ex: adjust to 35%.)

C to FLP1. VR(A). to 35%.

 VR(A). to 35%. Repeat.

Option: Adjust the center position of 

ÀDSVHUYR

C to CENTER. to desired point.

Close menu.

Adjustability:

• Rate: -100% to +100%, with a default of +30%

•Center position (CENTER7KHRSHUDWLRQUHIHUHQFHSRLQWRIÀDSFDQEHRIIVHWWRZLWKDGHIDXOWRI
87

BUTTERFLY (crow) mixing (GLID):

BUTTERFLY (often called "crow"- see GLID S  IRU GHWDLOV VLPXOWDQHRXVO\PRYHVWKH ÀDSWZLQ DLOHURQV DQG HOHYDWRU

and is usually used to make steep descents or to limit increases in airspeed in dives. Two separate BUTTERFLY settings are 

available. (CIR1CIR2)

Adjustability:

• Activation: Proportional by moving the THROTTLE STICK.

• Switch: Mix SWITCH is selectable. 

A to H: SWITCH A to H

NULL: always on. 

Also LOGIC SW (Lsw1 to 3) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW: See p. 38.

•Inversely proportional to THROTTLE STICK: provides a proportional increase in amount of airbrake action as 

THROTTLE STICK is lowered (when SWITCH A (assignable) is in the down position). Includes selectable stick 

position where airbrake begins. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly proportional to throttle stick, you will 

need to reverse the THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick direction for all models. See page 38 for 

instructions.

• Elevator settings: (adjustable in the B.FLY-ELE)

B.FLY-ELE links elevator with the BUTTERFLY function. Elevator rate is adjustable 

in a 3 point curve. 

Point 1: PRESET point. (Fixed)

Point 2: MID point. Position and rate are adjustable.

Point 3: END point. Position and rate are adjustable.

• Delayed reaction: You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when BUTTERFLY is activated by setting the 

delay (DELAYLWHPWRVORZGRZQWKHHOHYDWRUUHVSRQVHDOORZLQJWKHÀDSVDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUWRDOOUHDFKWKHLUGHVLUHGHQG

point together. A setting of 100% slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the prescribed distance. 

•Channels controlled:7ZLQ DLOHURQV ÀDS DQG VSRLOHUPD\ EH VHWLQGHSHQGHQWO\LQBUTTERFLY, including setting to 0 to 

have no effect. 

• Twin aileron servos: If AIL-DIFF function is inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2 settings will have no effect. 

• If AIL-DIFF is active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted. 

• Normally both ailerons are raised equally in BUTTERFLY, and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when the ailerons 

rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique characteristics of the 

model.

Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in BUTTERFLY. Along with creating an enormous amount 

of drag (desireble for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where the ailerons are, and 

encourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops", consider raising the 

DLOHURQVDQGGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVLQVWHDGDVVKRZQLQWKHGLDJUDPDERYH
88

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate BUTTERFLY.

Adjust the aileron and flap travel to 

75%.

Elevator settings are adjustable in the 

B.FLY-ELE.

Mix switch is selectable. 

Open the BUTTERFLY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to BUTTERFLY.

Activate the function. SWITCH A in up position.

C to MIX to OFF.

Adjust the travels as needed. 

(Ex: Ailerons each 75%, Flap 75%.)

C to AIL1 to 75%.

C to FLAP to 75%.

C to AIL2 to 75%.

Close menu.

Where next? View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

Channel 3's function selection (CONDITION/FUNCTION):

Channnel 3's function is selectable in the ARBK-FUNC item. (Throttle stick, switches, or knobs)

By selecting anything other than STK, channel 3's function may be separated from BUTTERFLY's function, so channel 3 can 

be used for other functions.

Adjustability:

•Channel 3's function: 

STK: THROTTLE STICK

Sw-A to H: SWITCH A to H

Vr-A to Vr-E: KNOB A to E
89

HELICOPTER MODEL FUNCTIONS 

Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane (GLID setups), and 

helicopter (HELI) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter. The Helicopter BASIC menu includes 

the normal condition's throttle and collective pitch curves and revo. mixing. Idle-ups and throttle hold are advanced 

features and are in the ADVANCE menu. 

HELICOPTER FUNCTIONS.......................................... 89

Table of contents and reference info for helicopters . 89

Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter ................... 90

HELI BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS .................................. 93

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY, NAME .......... 30 

PARAMETER Submenu: RESET, MODUL, ATL, AILE-2,

CONTRAST, BACK-LIGHT, HOME-DISP, USER NAME, LOGIC 

SW ............................................................................. 33

MODEL TYPE (PARAMETERS submenu) ........................ 93

Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38

SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel

correction) (not in H-1) .............................................. 95

END POINT .................................................................. 39

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition ................... 97

THR-CUTVSHFLDOL]HGVHWWLQJVIRUKHOLFRSWHUVSHFL¿F

models) ..................................................................... 98

'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDOD/R, EXP) .......... 42

TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45

Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH) ............................................................................. 46

TRAINER ..................................................................... 47

TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48

SERVO Display ........................................................... 49

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) ......................... 50

HELI ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS ............................. 99

THROTTLE HOLD .......................................................... 99

THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE and REVO ............................. 100

Idle-ups ................................................................... 101

7ULPVRIIVHW............................................................. 102

Delay ....................................................................... 103

Hovering setups ...................................................... 104

+LJKORZSLWFK ........................................................ 105

Gyros and governors ............................................... 106

0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-4 ............................................. 68

Curve, Prog. mixes 5-6 ............................................. 71

THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65

THROTTLE MIX ............................................................ 96

SWASH RING .............................................................. 96
90

GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC HELICOPTER 

This guideline is intended to help you set up a basic (H-1) heli, to get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on 

using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more with this powerful system than 

you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages—a big picture overview of what 

we're trying to accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and then a step-bystep instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model. 

%ULHÀ\WKHW\SLFDOKHOLFRSWHU¶VFRQWUROVDUHDVIROORZV

• Aileron: changes cyclic lateral (roll) . Rolls the helicopter. Tilts the swashplate to the left or right. CH1. 

• Elevator: changes cyclic pitch. Changes the helicopter’s angle of attack (nose up or nose down). Tilts the entire 

swashplate fore and aft. CH2.

• Rudder: changes the angle of the tail rotor. Yaws the helicopter left or right. CH4. 

•Collective Pitch: adjusts main rotor collective [angle of the paddles], changing the main blades’ pitch. Increased 

collective pitch (with throttle) causes the helicopter to rise. Moves in conjunction with throttle on the THROTTLE 

STICK. CH6. 

• Throttle:RSHQVFORVHVFDUEXUHWRU0RYHVLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKFROOHFWLYHSLWFKRQWKHTHROTTLE STICK. CH3. 

• REVO: mix that adds rudder in conjunction with pitch. This helps compensate for rotation of the helicopter caused by the 

LQFUHDVHGHQJLQHWRUTXH1HYHUXVHUHYRPL[LQJZLWKDKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URWKHJ\URDOUHDG\GRHVWKLV

)RUDGGLWLRQDOGHWDLOVVHHWKDWIXQFWLRQ
VVHFWLRQLQWKLVPDQXDO2WKHSDJHQXPEHUVDUHLQGLFDWHGLQWKH¿UVWFROXPQIRU\RX

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Prepare your helicopter. Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model's instructions. Set all trims, 

dials and sliders to neutral.

&RQ¿UPDOOFRQWUROOLQNDJHVDUHGHJUHHVRUSHULQVWUXFWLRQVIURPWKHVHUYR

horn to the ball link for proper geometry and that no slop is present.

Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control 

throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your 

model. Ex: HELI (H-1). See p. 93.

[ N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l 

functions for which the radio requires 

confirmation to make a change. Only 

critical changes require additional key 

strokes to accept the change.]

(If the correct model type was already 

displayed, be sure to do a model reset to 

discard any unwanted settings.)

In the BASIC menu, open the PARAMETER 

submenu.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

then C to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

Go to MODEL TYPE. C to TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: HELI(H-1). Confirm the change. 

Close PARAMETER.

to HELICOPTER. for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays. WRFRQ¿UP

C to SWASH.

to H-1. for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays. WRFRQ¿UP

to return to BASIC menu.

Then, NAME the model. P. 32.

(You do not need to do anything to 

“ save” or store this data.)

In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL 

submenu.

C as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

Go to MODEL NAME. C to NAME.

(First character of model'sname is highlighted.)

Input aircraft's name.

Close the MODELsubmenu when done.

WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU

When proper character is displayed,

C to move to next character. 

Repeat. to return to BASIC menu.
91

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Reverse servos as needed for proper 

control operation. Ex: LEFT RUDDER 

STICK results in leading edge of tail 

rotor blades moving left. Reverse to 

operate properly. P. 38.

In the BASIC menu, open REVERSE. C to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its 

direction of travel. (Ex: reverse rudder 

servo.)

C to CH4:RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Are you sure? Displays. 

for 1 second.

Repeat as needed.

to return to BASIC menu.

Adjust Travels as needed to match 

model's recommended throws (usually 

listed as high rates).P. 39.

In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT. C to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

Adjust the servos’ end points.

(Ex: elevator servo) 

Return to BASIC menu.

C to ELEV.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until up travel is as desired.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until down travel is as desired.

Repeat as needed. 

Activate THR-CUT. P. 98. Open THROTTLE-CUT function. C to THROTTLE-CUT.

to choose THR-CUT.

Activate the function. Choose desired 

switch and position to activate.

C to MIX to OFF.

C to SW. to C.

C to POSI. to DOWN.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust 

the rate until the engine consistently 

shuts off, but throttle linkage is not 

binding.1

Close.

C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

C to RATE. until shuts off.

Set up throttle curve for normal. (Usually 

changes will not need to be made prior 

WR¿UVWÀLJKW3

Open the THR-CURV/NOR function. 

Adjust if needed. 

Close the function.

C to THR-CURV/NOR. . C to 1 >.

to 5%. C to next point. 

Repeat.

Set up collective pitch curve for normal 

ÀLJKW:H VXJJHVWD VWDUWLQJ SRLQW RI 

center of +5,end of +8 to +10 degrees of 

blade pitch for aerobatics.2

 (If just learning 

WRÀ\DVN\RXULQVWUXFWRU3

Open the PIT-CURV/NOR function. 

Adjust each point to match desired 

FXUYH([¿UVWSRLQW8%.)

Close the function.

C to PIT-CURV/NOR. . C to 1 >.

to 8%. C to next point. 

Repeat.

Set up revo. mixing for normal. (For 

heading-hold gyros, inhibit revo.) P. 97.

Open the REVO./NOR function. 

Adjust to your desired starting point. 

(Ex: 10%.)

Close the function.

C to REVO./NOR. . C to 1 >.

to 10%. C to next point. 

Repeat.

&RQ¿UP*\URGLUHFWLRQ1RWHLIXVLQJ

D KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\UR XVHWKH

GYRO programming for proper setup. 

See p. 106.)

With radio on, move helicopter’s tail to the right by hand. 

The gyro should give right rudder input (leading edge of the tail rotor blades 

move left).

If the gyro gives the opposite input, reverse direction on the gyro unit itself.
92

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Learn how to operate HOVERING PITCH

and HOVERING THROTTLE. See p. 104.

Notice at half throttle, the VR(C) dial 

adjusts the throttle separately from the 

pitch. VR(A) adjusts the pitch separately 

from the throttle.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to SERVO.

throttle to center

VR(C) VR(A) center dials.

%H VXUHWR IROORZ \RXUPRGHO¶VLQVWUXFWLRQV IRU SUHÀLJKW FKHFNV EODGHWUDFNLQJ HWF1HYHU DVVXPH D VHW RI EODGHV DUH

properly balanced and will track without checking.

 Check receiver battery voltage! Always check voltage with a voltmeter prior to each and every engine start.(Never 

DVVXPHEHLQJSOXJJHGLQDOOQLJKWPHDQV\RXUUDGLRJHDULVUHDG\WRÀ\,QVXI¿FLHQWFKDUJHELQGLQJVHUYROLQNDJHV

and other problems can result in a dangerous crash with the possibility of injury to yourself, others and property.

&RQ¿UPWKHVZDVKSODWHLVOHYHODWWUDYHO$GMXVWDUPVLIQHHGHG

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level and there is no binding. Repeat for full cyclic pitch and 

roll. If not, adjust as needed to correct in END POINT: see p. 39.

Important note: prior to setting up throttle hold, idle-ups, offsets, etc, be sure to get your normal condition operating 

properly.

Checking setup prior to going airborne: Check voltage! Then, with the assistance of an instructor, and having completed 

all range checks, etc, gradually apply throttle until the helicopter becomes “light on the skids.” Adjust trims as needed to 

correct for any roll, pitch, or yaw tendencies. If the tail “wags,” the gyro gain is too high. Decrease gyro gain.

Where next? (Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

THROTTLE HOLD: P. 99.

SUB-TRIM p. 49 and separate trims for conditions (OFFSETS): p. 102.

Governor setup: p. 108.

IDLE-UP p. 101.

DELAYs to ease servo response when switching idle-ups: p. 103.

Rudder-to-throttle and other programmable mixes p. 68.

1

 Periodically move the throttle stick to full and back down to ensure proper servo settings. 

2

 It is critical that dials A and C be centered when the pitch and throttle curves are setup. 
93

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS 

MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used. Before 

GRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXS\RXUPRGHO¿UVW\RXPXVWGHFLGHZKLFKMODEL TYPEEHVW¿WV\RXUDLUFUDIW,I\RXUWUDQVPLWWHU

is a 10CAG, the default is ACRO. If it is a 10CHG, the default is HELI(H-1).

HELICOPTER SWASHPLATE TYPES: 

The 10CG radios support 8 basic swashplate setups, including "single servo" (H-1-many helicopters use this type) and 7 

types of CCPM (cyclic and collective pitch mixing). A "single servo" swashplate uses one servo for each axis: aileron, 

elevator (cyclic pitch), and collective pitch. CCPM helicopters utilize a combination of servos working together to achieve 

the 3 axes of motion. There are 7 basic CCPM types, displayed below. CCPM has several advantages, the most obvious 

of which is far less mechanical complexity to properly move the swashplate of the helicopter. Additionally, several servos 

working in unison (ex: HR3, all 3 servos together create elevator movement) dramatically increases the torque available as 

well as the precision and centering. 

Please note that some helicopters are type HR3 or HN3, except off by 180 degrees. For example, the Kyosho®

 Caliber is 

HR3 but with the 2 parallel servos to the rear of the helicopter, not front. If your model's swashplate is off by 180 degrees, 

you will still use that swashplate type, but also use SWASH AFR (p.95) to adjust the functions as needed until it operates 

properly. Additionally, different angles of CCPM may also be created utilizing the fully assignable programmable mixes. 

(See our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.) 

Not operating quite like you expected? ,QPDQ\&&30LQVWDOODWLRQV\RXQHHGWRHLWKHUUHYHUVHWKHGLUHFWLRQRIDVSHFL¿F

function (SWASH AFR) or reverse a single servo's direction (REVERSE). See SWASH AFR for details. (p.95) 

Swashplate Types

H-1 H-3 HR3

ELE ELE

ELE1

ELE2

120 ̊

120 ̊ 120 ̊

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

HN3

120 ̊

120 ̊

120 ̊

ELE

PIT

AIL

HE3

ELE

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

PIT

(AIL)

AIL

(PIT)

H-2

PIT

FRONT

AIL

H-4

ELE1

ELE2 AIL

PIT

H4X

(Normal linkage type)

H-1:each servo linked 

to the swashplate 

independently.
94

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change the MODEL TYPE and SWASH 

TYPE of model #3 from aircraft to 120

degree CCPM with 2 servos working in 

unison for collective pitch and aileron 

[HELI(HR3)].

Confirm you are currently using the 

proper model memory. (example: 3)

On home screen, check model name and 

# on top left.

If it is not the correct model (example:3), 

see MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

C to PARAMETER.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

(HELICOPTER)

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH

C to TYPE.

to HELICOPTER. for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays. WRFRQ¿UP1

Change to the desired SWASH TYPE 

(example: HR3.) 

&RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH

C to SWASH.

to HR3. for 1 second.

Are you sure? displays. WRFRQ¿UP

Close.

Where next? If a single servo is not operating properly, REVERSE: see p. 38.

If a control is operating backwards (i.e. Elevator), see SWASH AFR, p. 95.

If unsure see SWASH AFR.

1 Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model type is being changed. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior to 

completion, the model type will not be changed. 
95

SWASH AFR (not in SWH1):

Swashplate function rate settings (SWASH AFR UHGXFHLQFUHDVHUHYHUVHWKH UDWH

(travel) of the aileron, elevator (except H-2 ) and collective pitch functions, 

adjusting or reversing the motion of all servos involved in that function, only 

when using that function. Since these types utilize multiple servos together to 

create the controls, simply adjusting a servo's REVERSE or END POINT would not 

properly correct the travel of any one control. Since H-1 uses one servo for each 

function, there is no need for AFR in H-1.

This is fairly hard to explain but easy to see, so let's set up Kyosho®

 Caliber's swashplate settings as an example. With 

everything installed per factory instructions, set the model to HELI(HR3). Now let's adjust the swashplate properly. 

6LQFH DLOHURQ DOZD\V XVHV QRPRUHWKDQ  VHUYRV FKHFNLW ¿UVW(LWKHU ERWK RSHUDWH SURSHUO\ QR FKDQJH QHHGHG ERWK

operate backwards (reverse the whole function), or one servo operates backwards (reverse that servo alone). 

Next check elevator. Remember, the aileron servo(s) operate correctly, so if elevator does not, we should only have 2

choices left—the whole function needs to be reversed, or the servo(s) not shared with aileron need to be reversed. 

Last is collective. If the aileron and elevator controls are working properly, the only thing that could be wrong is the 

direction in which the collective operates (reverse the whole function). In our example, HR3 is 180 degrees off from the 

swashplate of the Caliber. Therefore, it is very likely that several functions will not operate properly. The collective pitch 

operation is backwards; but reversing all three servos would also reverse the aileron and elevator operations. Changing the 

collective pitch rate, however, from +50% to -50%, will reverse the collective pitch without affecting the aileron action.

CHECKING FOR PROPER MOTION ON AN HR3 SWASHPLATE

HR3 Swash Type PROPER MOTION WRONG MOTION HOW TO FIX

AILERON STICK. Swashplate tilts right. Swashplate tilts left. Reverse AIL setting in SWASH

to -50%.

Back of swashplate moves 

up.

Ch6 servo moves incorrectly; 

REVERSE.

Back of Swashplate moves 

down.

Ch1 servo moves incorrectly; 

REVERSE.

ELEVATOR STICK. Front of swash plate moves 

down; back of swashplate 

moves up.

S w a s h p l a t e m o v e s t h e 

opposite.

Reverse ELE setting in SWASH.

(ex: +50 to -50)

Entire swashplate moves up. Ch2 servo moves incorrectly; 

REVERSE.

RUDDER STICK. The leading edges of tail 

blades rotate left.

Blades rotated right. REVERSE the rudder servo.

THROTTLE STICK. Entire Swashplate lifts. Swashplate lowers. Reverse PIT setting in SWASH.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Adjust the travel of the collective pitch 

from +50% to -23%, reversing the travel 

of all 3 servos and decreasing their 

travel in collective pitch only, on an 

HR3 SWASH TYPE.

Open SWASH AFR function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to SWASH AFR.

Adjust PITC travel to -23%. C to PITC. to -23%.

Close the menu.

Where next? &RQ¿UPWKHVZDVKSODWHLVOHYHODWWUDYHO$GMXVWDUPVLIQHHGHG

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level. If not, adjust 

servo's travels as needed to correct. END POINT: see p. 39.

Set up the normal condition: (THR-CURV/NOR, PIT-CURV/NOR, REVO./NORM):

see p. 97.

Set up D/R,EXP: see p. 42.
96

Throttle Mixing (THROTTLE MIX):

This function can be set for each flight condition, and is used to correct the 

tendency of the model to change altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, 

elevator, and rudder controls. 

Adjustability:

0L[LQJPD\EHVHWIURPWRIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Correct the tendency of the model to 

change altitude.

Open THROTTLE MIX function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to 2nd page of ADVANCE menu.

C to THROTTLE MIX.

Activate the function. C to MIX to ON.

Adjust the rate.

Ex: IDL1 (AIL to TH) 10%

C to IDL1(AIL to TH) to 10%.

Repeat as needed.

Close the menu.

Where next? HI/LOW-PIT : see p. 105.

GOVERNOR set up: see p. 108.

Swash Ring (SWASH RINGOLPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRD¿[HGUDQJH

This function limits the swash travel to prevent damaging the swash linkage 

by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators. It is effective in 3D 

aerobatics which use a large amount of travel.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

To prevent damaging the swash linkage 

by simultaneous operation of the 

ailerons and elevators, set the limit 

point where swash throw stops.

*Adjust the rate at the maximum swash 

tilt by simultaneous operation of the 

ailerons and elevators 

Open SWASH RING function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

to 2nd page of ADVANCE menu.

C to SWASH RING.

Activate the function. C to MIX to ON.

Adjust the rate.

Ex: 90%

C to RATE to 90%.

Close the menu.

•Swash travel by simultaneous operation of 

the ailerons and elevators is limited within the 

circle(SWASH RING rate).

Adjustability:

• Initial value: 100%.

• Adjustment range: 0 to 200%.

Aileron operation

Elevator operation
97

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition:7KH1RUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQLVW\SLFDOO\XWLOL]HGIRUKRYHULQJ7KHWKURWWOHDQG

FROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHVDUHDGMXVWHGWRSURYLGHFRQVLVWHQWHQJLQH530GHVSLWHWKHLQFUHDVHGHFUHDVHLQFROOHFWLYHSLWFKRI

the blades. This keeps the engine from “bogging down” under excessive load (like trying to accelerate a car on a steep hill 

LQWKJHDURUH[FHVVLYH530XQGHULQVXI¿FLHQWORDGOLNHÀRRULQJWKHWKURWWOHZKLOHLQQHXWUDOULVNLQJHQJLQHGDPDJH

$VWKHFXUYHVDQGUHYRPL[LQJDUHDOOLQWHUUHODWHGZHZLOOGLVFXVVDOOWKUHH¿UVWWKHQFRPSOHWHDVDPSOHVHWXS

Note that the normal throttle, pitch and revo curves are all available in the BASIC menu for simplicity. These may also be 

updated later in the ADVANCE menu with the settings for the other 4 conditions [idle-up 1 (IDL1), idle-up 2 (IDL2) and idleup 3 (IDL3), plus throttle hold (HOLD)]. Note: The throttle and pitch curves for the normal condition are always on. They 

cannot be inhibited. The other four conditions are activated with their throttle curves or throttle hold. For idle-ups, see p. 

90. For throttle hold, see p. 99. 

• THR-CURV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) throttle curve, which is usually not a linear response to THROTTLE STICK

motion. Adjusting point 4 of the curve adjusts the engine’s RPM at the THROTTLE STICK midpoint, the desired 

position for hovering. The other 6 points are then adjusted to create the desired idle and maximum engine speed, and a 

smooth transition in-between. For more on throttle curves, see p. 101. 

• PIT-CURV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) collective pitch curve, the collective pitch curve for flight near hover. The 

normal collective pitch curve is adjusted to match the throttle curve, providing the best vertical performance at a constant 

engine speed, with a starting curve of -4 base, +5 neutral, and +8 to +10 degrees of blade pitch maximum*. You can 

program the response over a 7-point curve for the best collective pitch angles relative to THROTTLE STICK movement. 

For more on collective pitch curves, see p. 101. 

• REVO./NORM: mixes collective pitch commands to the rudder (a PITCH-RUDDER mix) to suppress the torque generated 

by changes in the main rotor's collective pitch angle, keeping the model from yawing when throttle is applied. REVO. is 

H[WUHPHO\KHOSIXOLQ3WDPLQJWKHWDLO ́RIPRGHOVQRWXVLQJKHDGLQJKROGAVCS gyros. 

NOTE: There are three revo. mixes available: normal (NORMLGOHXS   IDL1/2), and idle-up 3 (IDL3). All 3 are 

adjustable in the ADVANCEPHQX1HYHUXVHUHYRPL[LQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URV)RUGHWDLOVRQ

revo, including default points for clockwise and counter clockwise rotating rotors, see p. 101. 


7KHVH GHIDXOW UHFRPPHQGDWLRQV DVVXPH \RX DUH GRLQJ IRUZDUG ÀLJKW ,I \RX DUHMXVWOHDUQLQJ SOHDVH IROORZ \RXULQVWUXFWRU¶V JXLGDQFH 6RPH

LQVWUXFWRUVOLNHDEDVHSRLQWIRUWUDLQLQJVRWKDWWKHKHOLFRSWHUFRPHVGRZQYHU\VORZO\HYHQLI\RXULQVWLQFWVSXOOWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYHVWLFNWR

the bottom in a hurry. 
98

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up Normal Flight Condition 

Throttle/Collective Pitch Curves and 

Revo.

Base point: Adjust base point of throttle 

curve until engine idles reliably on the 

ground. Adjust base point of collective 

pitch curve to achieve -4 degrees of 

blade pitch. Apply throttle until the 

model sits ‘light’ on its skids. Adjust 

base point of REVO. until model does not 

rotate its nose at all.

Open the THR-CURV/NOR function.

$GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([5%.)

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

C to THR-CURV/NOR.

C to POINT-1. to 5%.

Open the PIT-CURV/NOR function. 

$GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([8%.)

C to PIT-CURV/NOR.

C to POINT-1. to 8%.

Open the REVO. /NORM function.

$GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([4%.)

C to REVO. /NORM.

C to MIX. to ON.

C to POINT-1. to 4%.

Hover point: Adjust collective pitch 

curve to +5 degrees. Ease heli into a 

KRYHU /DQGVKXW HQJLQH RII$GMXVW

throttle curves and rudder trim. Repeat 

until model hovers smoothly at half 

WKURWWOH5DSLGO\DSSO\WKURWWOHIURP

WRVWLFN$GMXVWREVO. points 2 and 3 

until the model does not rotate its nose 

up on throttle application.

Adjust THR-CURV/NOR. Repeat above as needed.

Adjust PIT-CURV/NOR. Repeat above as needed.

Adjust REVO. /NORM. Repeat above as needed.

High point: Adjust collective pitch 

curve to +8 to +10 degrees. From hover, 

throttle up rapidly. If engine bogs, 

increase the throttle curve. If engine 

over-revs, increase the collective pitch 

curve at points 6 or 7. Apply full throttle 

while hovering, then descend back to a 

hover. Adjust REVO. until the nose does 

not change heading.

Adjust THR-CURV/NOR. Repeat above as needed.

Adjust PIT-CURV/NOR. Repeat above as needed.

Adjust REVO. /NORM. Repeat above as needed.

Where next? GYRO function: see p. 107.

Adjust HOV-THR and HOV-PIT if needed: see p. 104.

Setting up Throttle Hold: see p. 99.

Setting up idle-ups 1, 2 and 3: Throttle and collective pitch curves and revo.

mixing (THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX): see p. 101.

GOVERNOR function: see p. 108.

D/R,EXP: see p. 42.

THROTTLE CUT:

The THROTTLE-CUT function is used to kill the engine at the end of a flight. 

The engine can be stopped with one touch of any switch, eliminating the need 

WRPRYHWKHWULPWR NLOOWKH HQJLQH DQGWKHQ UHDGMXVW SULRUWR HDFK ÀLJKW7KH

helicopter THROTTLE-CUTLQFOXGHV DQ 212))WKURWWOH SRVLWLRQ QRUPDOO\ D

little above idle). You must move the THROTTLE STICK back below the set 

point before the THROTTLE-CUT function can be reset, to avoid sudden engine 

acceleration. For a detailed example of throttle cut setup, see ACRO p. 41. 

Note: Be sure to add the step of setting a trigger point by cursoring to THRO, then putting the THROTTLE STICK in the 

desired position and pressing and holding the dial for one second. Notice that this function cannot be reversed to trigger 

only above the stick point. 
99

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS 

THR-HOLD: This function holds the engine in the idling position and disengages it from the THROTTLE STICK when 

SWITCH E (10CHG) or G (10CAG) is moved. It is commonly used to practice auto-rotation. 

Prior to setting up THR-HOLD, hook up the throttle linkage so that the carburetor 

is opened fully at high throttle, then use the digital trim to adjust the engine idle 

position. To have THR- HOLD maintain idle, move the THROTTLE STICK to the 

idle position, then move the hold SWITCH on and off and keep changing the 

offset value until the servo does not move. To lower the engine idle speed, or if 

you want to shut the engine off, input a higher negative number. 

Adjustability:

•Idling position: Range of -50% to +50% centered about the throttle idle position to get the desired engine RPM. 

• Switch assignment: Assigned to SWITCH G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) down. 

Adjustable in the CONDITION SELECT (THR-HOLD item). 

(2-position type switch only)

• Throttle curve: Since the throttle is moved to a single preset position, no curve 

is available for THR-HOLD.

•Collective pitch curve: Independent curve, typically adjusted to create a blade 

pitch range of -4% to +10% to +12%, is automatically activated with THRHOLD.

• Revo. mix: Since revo. mix adjusts for torque from the engine, no revo. mix is available for THR-HOLD.

• Priority: The throttle hold function has priority over idle-up. Be sure that the throttle hold and idle-up SWITCHES are 

in the desired positions before trying to start the engine. (We recommend starting your engine in throttle hold for safety 

reasons.)

• Gyro: Gyro programming includes an option to have a separate gyro setting for each condition, including THR-HOLD.

This avoids the potential problem of the user being in the wrong gyro setting when going to THR-HOLD, resulting in an 

improper rudder offset and the model pirouetting. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up throttle hold.

Determine desired throttle position of 

the idling engine, turn on THR-HOLD, and 

adjust percentage as required to reach 

the desired running point. 

Open THR-HOLD function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to THR-HOLD.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to OFF.

Set desired engine position. C to POSI. to desired percent. 

Close.

Where next? PIT-CURVE for THR-HOLD: see p. 101.

DELAY for THR-HOLD (to ease collective pitch response): see p. 103.

GYRO setup: see p. 107.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. 

Mixing(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.

D/R,EXP: see p. 42.
100

THR-CURVE and PIT-CURVE: These 7-point curves are utilized to best match the blade collective pitch to the engine RPM for 

consistent load on the engine. Curves are separately adjustable for normal, idle-up 1, idle-up 2, and idle-up 3. In addition, 

a separate collective pitch curve is available for throttle hold. Sample curves are displayed in the appropriate setup types (ex: 

QRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQSIRUFODULW\

Suggested defaults: 

• Normal: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 4 and 7 providing -4, +5, (+8 to +10)* degrees pitch. A throttle 

curve setting of 0, 25, 36, 50, 62.5, 75, 100%. 

,GOHXSV	,GOHXSVDQGDUHW\SLFDOO\WKHVDPHH[FHSWIRUWKHJ\URVHWWLQJVZLWKRQHEHLQJKHDGLQJKROG$9&6

and the other being normal mode. The pitch curve will likely be similar to the normal curve above. 

• Idle-up 3: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 4 and 7 providing (-8 to -10), 0, (+8 to +10) degrees. A throttle 

curve of 100, 75, 62.5, 50, 62.5, 75, 100 to provide full throttle for inverted maneuvers. 

• Throttle Hold pitch curve: Start with the normal pitch curve (for inverted autos, start from the idle-up 3 pitch curve), but 

LQFUHDVHWKHODVWSRLQWDSSUR[LPDWHO\LIDYDLODEOHWRHQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWSLWFKDWODQGLQJ


7KHVH GHIDXOW UHFRPPHQGDWLRQV DVVXPH \RX DUH GRLQJ IRUZDUG ÀLJKW ,I \RX DUHMXVWOHDUQLQJ SOHDVH IROORZ \RXULQVWUXFWRU¶V JXLGDQFH 6RPH

LQVWUXFWRUVOLNHDEDVHSRLQWIRUWUDLQLQJVRWKDWWKHKHOLFRSWHUFRPHVGRZQYHU\VORZO\HYHQLI\RXULQVWLQFWVSXOOWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYHVWLFNWR

the bottom in a hurry.) 

Adjustability:

• Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience. 

• All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCE menu. 

• Automatically selected with the proper condition. 

7KHLGOHXSFXUYHVDUHSURJUDPPHGWRPDLQWDLQFRQVWDQW530HYHQZKHQWKHFROOHFWLYHSLWFKLV UHGXFHGGXULQJÀLJKW

(including inverted). 

• To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up to COND> and change the curve named. 

• For clarity, the name of the condition currently active (switched on in the radio) is shown in parentheses behind name of 

condition whose curve is being edited. (Example: see curve displays below. Note that the normal condition is active but 

the idle-up 1 condition’s curves are currently being edited. 

• Moving and deleting the curve point: The curve point (-stk-) can be moved to the left or right by turning the DIAL (up to 

LQIURQWRIWKHDGMRLQLQJSRLQWDQGGHOHWHGUHWXUQHGE\SUHVVLQJWKHDIAL for one second alternately. 

•Copying the curve: To copy the current curve onto another condition’s curve, cursor up to COND> and press the DIAL for 

one second. Then select to desired condition and press the DIAL for one second.

• Idle-ups and throttle hold pitch curves may be edited even before the conditions have been made active. Activating their 

throttle curves activates these conditions. 

REVO. MIX: This 5-point curve mix adds opposite rudder input to counteract the changes in torque when the speed and 

collective pitch of the blades is changed. 

Adjustability:

• Three separate curves available: normal for hovering; idle-ups 1 and 2 combined; and idle-3. 

• Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience. 

• All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCE menu. 

&RUUHFWPL[LVDXWRPDWLFDOO\VHOHFWHGLQÀLJKWZLWKHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGDXWRPDWLFDOO\DFWLYDWHGZKHQWKHWKURWWOHVHWXSIRU

that condition is activated in the programming (i.e. THROTTLE HOLD or THR-CURVE.)

• To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up above POINT5 and select. For clarity, the name of the 

condition currently active (switched on at the radio) is shown in parentheses behind the name of the condition whose 

curve is being edited. 
101

Revo. mixing rates are 5-point curves. For a clockwise-turning rotor, the rudder is mixed in the clockwise direction 

when collective pitch is increased; for counterclockwise-turning, the opposite. Change the operating direction setting by 

changing the signs of the numbers in the curve from plus (+) to minus (-) and vice-versa. Suggested defaults: 

Clockwise rotation: -20, -10, 0, +10, +20% from low throttle to high.

Counterclockwise rotation: +20, +10, 0, -10, -20% from low throttle to high.

Adjust to the actual values that work best for your model.

Revo. curves for idle-ups are often v-shaped to provide proper rudder input with negative pitch and increased throttle 

GXULQJLQYHUWHG ÀLJKW 5XGGHULV QHHGHGWR FRXQWHUWKH UHDFWLRQ ZKHQHYHUWKHUHLVLQFUHDVHGWRUTXH ,QLQYHUWHG ÀLJKW

throttle stick below half has increased throttle and negative pitch, therefore increasing torque and rotating the helicopter 

unless the revo. mix is also increasing appropriately.) 

IDLE-UPS: DGGLWLRQDO ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQV DYDLODEOH VSHFL¿FDOO\ IRU KHOLFRSWHUV7KHVH DGGLWLRQDO ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQV FRQWDLQ

different throttle curves, collective pitch curves, revo. mixing, and trims (except IDLE-3) to make the helicopter perform 

certain maneuvers more easily. Lastly, the gyro and dual rate functions may be set to provide separate rates per condition 

selected, including one for each idle-up. 

2QHRIWKHPRVWFRPPRQÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVLVVHWXSWRDOORZWKHKHOLFRSWHUWRHDVLO\ÀLSIURPXSULJKWWRLQYHUWHGDQGEDFN

To do so, the pitch curve is set to 0 pitch at half stick, positive pitch (climb upright) above half, and negative pitch (climb

when inverted) below half stick. The throttle curve is adjusted to allow the engine to run consistently throughout the 

changes in pitch. 

Additional idle-ups may be used to maximize the helicopter's flight characteristics in certain types of flight (i.e. fast 

forward motion, backward) or maneuvers (loops, rolls, stall turns), or even the same maneuver but changing from headingKROG$9&6J\URPRGHWRQRUPDOJ\URPRGH7KH&SURYLGHVLGOHXSVWRDOORZWKHPRGHOHUDGGLWLRQDOVHWXSVDORQJ

ZLWKWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ1RWHWKDWIDL3 does not include governor settings.) 

Adjustability:

• SWITCH G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) is programmed for normal (NORM), idleup 1 (IDLE-UP1), and idle-up 2 (IDLE-UP2) curves. 

Adjustable in the CONDITION SELECT (IDLE-UP1/2, IDLE-UP3 items). 

(IDLE-UP1/2 3-position type switch only, IDL3 2-position type switch only)

• Activated with the throttle curve for that condition in THR-CURVE.

• Curves are adjusted to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch 

is negative (inverted). 

• Note that REVO.mixing has one curve for idle-ups 1 and 2 and a second curve just for idle-up3. 

• Gyro settings may be set separately for each idle-up. (See p. 101.) 

*RYHUQRU VHWWLQJVPD\ EH VHW XSWR IROORZ 1RUPDO,GOH,GOH EXW GR QRW RIIHU D VHWWLQJWR DGMXVW IRU HDFK RIWKH 

conditions like gyro. (See p. 101.) 

• Activating OFFSET makes the TRIM LEVERS adjust the trim separately in each of the idle-up conditions. 

For an example of throttle and pitch curves and revo, please see Normal Flight Condition Setup, p. 97. 
102

OFFSET: Optional separate trims in addition to those for the normal condition. This function is used to automatically change 

WKHWULP RID KHOLFRSWHU)RUH[DPSOHZKHQWUDQVLWLRQLQJ IURPKRYHUWRÀ\LQJDW KLJK VSHHGDFORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ URWRU

helicopter tends to drift to the right at high speed, so an aileron offset may be applied to offset the helicopter to the left.

The necessary elevator offset varies with model geometry, so it must be determined by noting collective pitch changes at 

high speed. The rudder offset is affected by both revo. mixing and trim lever movement while in the offset function. 

Adjustability:

• Complete switch assignability, plus a CONDITION SELECT RSWLRQWKDW FUHDWHV

switches between individual trims for each of the idle-ups. 

• When OFFSET is active (its switch is on), moving the TRIM LEVERS adjusts 

the stored offset, not the trims in the normal condition. 

• When OFFSET is inactive (its switch is off), the OFFSET and any trim adjustments 

WRLWKDYHQRHIIHFWPRGHOREH\VWKHWULPVHWWLQJVRIWKHFXUUHQWO\DFWLYHÀLJKW

condition.)

• When OFFSETLVLQKLELWHGWULPDGMXVWPHQWVPDGHLQDQ\ÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQDIIHFW

DOOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV

• Rapid jumps caused by large offsets can be slowed using the DELAY function. 

*During OFFSET operation, the aileron, elevator, and rudder travels are displayed on each trim 

display in the Startup screen. 

NOTE:5HPHPEHU RIIVHWV DQG UHYRPL[HV DUH QRW UHFRPPHQGHG ZKHQ XVLQJ KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\URV EHFDXVHWKH\

FRQÀLFWZLWKWKHDXWRPDWLFFRUUHFWLRQVWRWULPDQGWRUTXHWKDW$9&6SURYLGHV

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up separate trims for each of the 

three idle-up conditions. 

Adjust the idle-up 2 rudder trim to 

correct for torque at high speeds.

Open the OFFSET function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to OFFSET.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to OFF or ON.

Change switch setting to Cond.

(No need to change SW.)

already Cond.

Select IDL2. C to No. to IDL2.

Adjust trim settings as needed. 

(Ex:rudder to +8%.)

C to RUDD. to +8%.

&ORVHPHQXV DQG FRQ¿UP GLIIHUHQFHLQ

trims between normal and idle-up 2. E (T10CHG) or G (T10CAG) 

from NORMAL to IDL2. Check that rudder 

trim changes.

Where next? DELAY: see p. 103.

THR-HOLD: see p. 99.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing 

(THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.
103

DELAY: The Delay function provides a smooth transition between the trim positions whenever OFFSET, REVO. MIXING, or 

THROTTLE HOLD functions are turned on and off. 

Adjustability:

• Separate delay times are available for aileron, elevator, rudder, throttle, and 

pitch.

• With a 50% delay setting, the servo takes about a half-second to move to its 

new position...quite a long time. 

,QJHQHUDOGHOD\VRIDSSUR[LPDWHO\DUHVXI¿FLHQW

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a delay on all channels to ease 

WKHWUDQVLWLRQ IURP RQH ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ

to another so there are no "hard jumps."

Open the DELAY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to DELAY.

Adjust AILE response as needed. (Ex: 

aileron to +8%.)

to +8%.

Repeat for other channels. C to ELEV. Repeat step above. 

Close menus and confirm slowed 

transitions. E (T10CHG) or G (T10CAG) 

from NORMAL to IDL2. Check that servos 

move gradually to new positions.

Where next? THR-HOLD: see p. 99.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing 

(THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.
104

HOVERING ADJUSTMENTS (HOV-THR and HOV-PIT):

+RYHULQJWKURWWOHDQGKRYHULQJSLWFKDUH¿QHWXQLQJDGMXVWPHQWVIRUWKHWKURWWOHDQGFROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHVLQGLYLGXDOO\

DIIHFWLQJSHUIRUPDQFHRQO\DURXQGWKHFHQWHUSRLQWDQGRQO\LQWKHQRUPDOFRQGLWLRQ7KH\DOORZLQÀLJKWWZHDNLQJRIWKH

curves for ideal setup.

Adjustability:

5RWRUVSHHGFKDQJHVFDXVHGE\WHPSKXPLGLW\DOWLWXGHRURWKHUFKDQJHVLQÀ\LQJFRQGLWLRQVDUHHDVLO\DFFRPPRGDWHG

• Both adjustments may be inhibited if not desired. 

• Both adjustments may also be set to NULL, temporarily turning off the knob but maintaining the last memorized setting. 

• Adjustments may be memorized and then the knobs returned to center point to use that amount of adjustment. Allows 

easy use of the trimming knobs for multiple models. (Note that when memorization is repeated with the knob offset from 

center, the trim value accumulates.) 

• Adjustments are quickly reset to the initial value by turning the dial until the trim reads 0%, memorizing, then returning 

the knob to its center position. 

• Note that all functions, including these, assume the model hovers at half stick. 

• Available in normal (NORMRUQRUPDOLGOHXSNORM/IDL1) condition only. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Fine-tune hovering with the hovering 

adjustments. Remember these affect 

only the hovering (normal) condition.

Adjust throttle and collective pitch 

curves until the model hovers nicely. In 

ÀLJKWDGMXVWFROOHFWLYHSLWFKDQGWKURWWOH

curves near hover point independently 

with HOV-THR and HOV-PIT knobs. 

6WRUHQHZVHWWLQJVDIWHUÀLJKW

Open the HOV-THR function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to HOV-THR.

Optional: change which knob adjusts 

each hovering curve. NULL locks in 

curve in last stored position.

C to VR.

to desired knob and direction. 

Store the current dial settings prior to 

selecting another model.

C to RATE.

for one second to store. 

or VR(C) to center.

Close.

Open the HOV-PIT function. C to HOV-PIT.

Store the current dial settings prior to 

selecting another model.

C to RATE.

for one second to store. 

or VR(A) to center.

Close.

Where next? THR-HOLD: see p. 99.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing 

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.

D/R,EXP: see p. 42.
105

HIGH/LOW PITCH (HI/LO-PIT):

7KLVIXQFWLRQPD\EHXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHFXUYHVKLJKDQGORZVLGHLQGLYLGXDOO\IRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQQRUPDOLGOHXS

idle-up 2, idle-up 3, throttle hold). 

Adjustability:

<RXPD\ GH¿QH KLJK DQGORZVLGH UDWHWULP NQREV WKH KLJK VLGH SLWFKWULP

FRQWUROLVGH¿QHGDVWKHULJKWVLGHOHYHUDWLQLWLDOVHWWLQJ

• The conditions are activated in the CONDITION SELECT function (p.100). 

• Both adjustments may be set to MANUAL, temporarily turning off the knob. 

• Adjustments may be memorized and then return the knobs to center point to 

use that amount of adjustment. Allows easy use of the trimming knobs for 

multiple models. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up a high pitch curve in the idle-up 

1 condition. 

6WRUHQHZVHWWLQJVDIWHUÀLJKW

Open the HI/LO-PIT function. for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to HI/LO-PIT.

Select the idle-up 1 condition. C to NORM. to IDL1.

Set the rate. (Ex: 80%) C to HI-PIT.

to 80%.

Optional: change which knob adjusts 

high pitch curve.

C to VR.

to desired knob and direction. 

Store the current dial settings prior to 

selecting another model.

C to HI-PIT.

for one second to store. 

or VR(E) to center.

Close.

Where next? PIT-CURVE: see p. 100.

HOV-PIT: see p. 104.
106

*<526DQG*29(512568VLQJHOHFWURQLFVWRWDNHVRPHRIWKHFRPSOH[LW\RXWRIVHWXSVDQGÀLJKW

What is a gyro? A gyroscope is an electronic unit that senses motion and corrects for it. For example, if the wind blows 

\RXUKHOLFRSWHU¶VWDLOWRWKHOHIWDJ\URZLOOVHQVHWKDWPRWLRQFRQ¿UPLQJWKDWQRLQSXWZDVJLYHQDQGZLOOFRUUHFWIRULW

How does it help in helicopter setup? A good gyro will totally eliminate the need for revo. mixing. The gyro will sense and 

correct the unwanted motion for you, so you don’t have to spend time to get a complex curve operating properly. 

Gyro sensor types: There are many different kinds of gyros. Early gyros were mechanical, with a spinning drum similar 

to a child’s gyroscopic toy. The next generation utilized a special type of crystal, called piezoelectric, which sensed the 

PRWLRQDQGSURYLGHGDQHOHFWULFDOSXOVH7KH¿QHVWJ\URVDWWKHWLPHRIWKLVZULWLQJDUH0(060LFUR(OHFWUR0HFKDQLFDO

System) technology. These sensors, or computer chips, sense the motion. MEMS is far more accurate and less susceptible 

to inaccuracies caused by temperature changes, etc. 

Types of gyro responses: 

• Normal: sense motion and dampen it (if the gyro rotates off course for 2 seconds, it corrects for 2 seconds). 

+HDGLQJKROG$9&6 FDOFXODWHWKH DQJOH RI URWDWLRQ E\WUDFNLQJWKHWLPHUDWH RI FKDQJH DQGWKHQ SURYLGH FRUUHFWLRQ

until the same rotation is achieved. 

• Stick priority: a feature on most high-end gyros. The more input given on the channel the gyro controls, the less sensitive 

the gain is automatically. This way, if you give a large input for a stall turn, for example, the gyro turns itself off and 

GRHVQRW¿JKWWKHVWDOOWXUQ$V\RXHDVHRIIWKH UXGGHUWKHJDLQLQFUHDVHVDJDLQPLQLPL]LQJWDLOZDJDQGNHHSLQJWKH

model straight. (If your gyro does not include stick priority, you can manually create it. Please see www.futaba-rc.com\

faq\.)

Choosing the right gyro for your skills, your helicopter, and your budget: 

• Mechanical: some are still available. They are very challenging to set up and not as reliable as piezo or SMM. 

• Non-Heading-Hold Piezo: these are now inexpensive gyros that are reliable and easy to set up. Some have dual rates and 

UHPRWHJDLQFRQWUROWRDGMXVWVHQVLWLYLW\LQÀLJKW7KH\GRKRZHYHUODFNKHDGLQJKROGFDSDELOLWLHVIRUSUHFLVLRQÀ\LQJ

• Heading-Hold Piezo: Until recently, the cream of the crop. Expensive, and more complex to set up. Adds GPS-like 

KHDGLQJUHFRJQLWLRQ([KLELWVPLQRUGLI¿FXOWLHVZLWKWHPSHUDWXUHGULIWSRVLWLRQVHWWLQJYDU\LQJZLWKXQLW¶VWHPSHUDWXUH

• Heading-Hold SMM: 21st Century gyro technology. Computer chip technology. Expensive, easier set up, higher 

GXUDELOLW\6LJQL¿FDQWGHFUHDVHLQWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVLWLYLW\0DQ\LQFOXGHIUDPHUDWHVHWWLQJVWRDOORZIDVWHUUHVSRQVHZKHQ

using specialized digital servos. Examples: 

• GY401: Simpler set up. Ideal for learning aerobatics through 3D. 

• GY502: Better centering than 401 for more advanced aerobatics. Ideal through Class III competition. 

• GY611: Exceptional center. Extremely fast response time. Requires specialized servo. 

• Heading-Hold MEMS: GY520 is the smallest and lightest heading hold AVCS gyro available today. Its cutting-edge 

MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical System) sensor design, ultra high-speed processing speed and advanced PID control 

algorithm put it a quantum leap ahead of all other heading hold gyros in size, weight and performance. The GY520 has 

been optimized to work with small electric models and larger nitro (.30 through .91) sized helicopters.

GYROVLPSOL¿HVDGMXVWLQJVHOHFWLQJWKHJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\DQGFDQSURYLGHPRUHWKDQWZRJ\URJDLQVHWWLQJV7KHKLJKHUWKH

gain, the more correction the gyro provides and the “softer” or less responsive the helicopter feels.) This function makes 

WKHEHVWSRVVLEOHXVHRIWKHLQÀLJKWDGMXVWDEOHJDLQRIPRVWJ\URV

Adjustability:

• Plug the gyro’s sensitivity adjustment to channel 5 of the receiver. (not assignable) 

• STDDQG$9&6+HDGLQJKROGGYVHWXSW\SHVDYDLODEOHWRVLPSOLI\DGMXVWPHQWVIRU$9&6+HDGLQJKROGJ\URV

• Full switch assignability or may select Cond. option. 

• Cond. option provides separate gyro settings, one for each condition, automatically selected with the condition. Allows 

FKDQJHVLQJDLQWRPHHWWKHVSHFL¿FQHHGVRIHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

• Each gyro setting may be set from 0 to +100 (NOR100% to AVC100%) gain, equating to ATV settings of -100% to +100%. 

'XDOPRGHJ\URVKHDGLQJKROG$9&6DQGQRUPDODUHHDVLO\WULJJHUHGWRHDFKPRGHE\FKDQJLQJWKHJ\URVHWWLQJ¶VVLJQ

Negative settings trigger normal mode; positive settings are AVCS mode. 

• Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness. 

• Tail wagging or shaking indicates excessive gain settings. Turn down gyro setting until wag stops.
107

Gain Example for AVCS/Heading-hold Gyros (GY)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

6HWXSDKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URZLWK

KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 VHWWLQJLQLGOHXSV

1 and 2 and normal mode setting in idleup 3 and normal.

Open and activate the GYRO SENSE

function.

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to GYRO SENSE.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Optional: change gyro type to Headinghold (GY).

C to MODE. to GY.

Optional: change switch assignment. 

Ex: select Cond.

C to SW. to Cond.

Adjust gyro rates as needed. 

(Ex: NORM, IDL3 to NOR 50%. IDL1 and 2

to AVC 50% as starting points.)

C to NORM. to NOR 50%.

C to IDL1. to AVC 50%.

Repeat.

Close the function.

Where next? GOVERNOR: see p. 108.

D/R,EXP: see p. 42.

DELAY: see p. 103.

0% 50% +100%

"Heading Hold Mode" "Normal Mode"

100% NOR 0% 100% AVC

GY

STD
108

GOVERNORS:

What is a governor? A governor is made up of a set of sensors which read the RPM of the helicopter’s head, and a 

control unit that automatically adjusts the throttle setting to maintain a constant head speed regardless of changes in pitch 

of blades, weather conditions, etc. Governors are extremely popular in competition helicopters due to the consistency 

provided.

How does it help in helicopter setup? The governor eliminates the need to spend large amounts of time setting up throttle 

curves, as it automatically adjusts the engine’s RPM to maintain the desired head speed. 

GOVERNOR: The Governor mixing function is used to adjust the GV-1 (Governor) speed settings (rS1, rS2, rS3) from the 

transmitter. (If you are using a different governor, follow the manufacturer's instructions.) 

Adjustability:

2QRIIPD\EHVHSDUDWHGIURPURWRUVSHHGE\SOXJJLQJWKHJRYHUQRURQRIILQWR

ch8 and changing CUT-CH setting. 

,I XVLQJ VHSDUDWH RQRII VZLWFK DVVLJQPHQWLVWRWDOO\ DGMXVWDEOH%H FDUHIXO

not to assign governor off to a condition switch if you want the governor to 

function in that condition. 

6SHHGVZLWFKLQJDQGJRYHUQRU212))PD\EHWRJHWKHUXVLQJRQHVZLWFKRU

212))VZLWFKLQJPD\EHSHUIRUPHGXVLQJDQLQGHSHQGHQWVZLWFKFKDQQHO

:KHQ VSHHG VHWWLQJ FRQWURO XVHV&+ DQG D VHSDUDWH 212)) VZLWFKLV QRW

used, CH8 can be used for other functions. 

,QÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQWRIWKHKHDGVSHHGIRUHDV\DGMXVWPHQWGXULQJWXQLQJPD\

be created using an additional channel and a programmable mix. See www.

futaba-rc.com\faq\ for details. 

GV-1 connections

Magnetic sensor

Throttle servo

Control amp

Mixture servo

Connected only when

fuel mixture function

used.

Throttle

channel

Speed setting channel

Connected when speed set from

transmitter

Governor ON/OFF / Mixture trim channel

Connected when the governor is turned on and off

from transmitter and when mixture trim function is

used, or when mixture curve data is sent from transmitter to governor

Receiver
109

The GV-1 controls throttle when it is active, so the throttle will not obey any FailSafe setting presets for throttle in the 

WUDQVPLWWHU$OZD\VVHWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJIRUWKH*9¶VRQRIIFKDQQHOWR2))7KLVZD\WKHJRYHUQRULVVKXWRII

and the throttle obeys the FailSafe throttle commands. 

Expert Tip: Mounting the GV-1 to the counter gear instead of the fan 

GUDPDWLFDOO\VLPSOL¿HVLQVWDOODWLRQLQPDQ\PRGHOV

Setting example: :KHQVSHHGDQG212))DUHXVLQJRQHVZLWFK

Governor Speed Switch Position

(Switch C or Cond.) Rate (%) Adjustment from Tx.

RS1: OFF UP or NORM 0 Use up to 0%. 

(Governor speed display reads “off”.)

RS2: 1400 CNTR or IDL1 50 Speed adjusted by raising and lowering rate.

RS3: 1700 DOWN or IDL2 100 Speed adjusted by lowering rate.

*The relationship of the governor speed setting rS1~rS3 and the switch positions conforms to the table above. 

*In throttle hold, always check that the governor is off. 

*If the speed value rises when the cut switch is activated, reverse the “DIR” setting from UP to DOWN or vice versa. 

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

S e t u p a G V- 1 g o v e r n o r t o u s e 

b o t h c h a n n e l s i n t o t h e r e c e i v e r 

and switch between the governor 

settings automatically when changing 

conditions. Consider setting the battery 

FailSafe settings and other helpful 

functions on the GV-1 itself.

Open and activate the GOVERNOR

function.

for 1 second. (If BASIC, again.)

C to GOVERNOR.

Activate the function. C to MIX. to ACT.

Optional: change cut-off channel 

to channel 8 and assign switch and 

direction for on/off (channel 8).

C to cut-CH to +CH8.

C to cut- S W . t o d e s i r e d 

SWITCH.

Optional: change switch assignment to 

select governor settings. 

Ex: select switch that adjusts the 

conditions.

C to SW.

to Cond.

Adjust governor speed settings per 

switch position or condition as needed.

(Ex: defaults are fine.) Allows head 

speed adjustment from transmitter.

C to each Cond position.

or as needed.

C to next Cond position. Repeat.

Close the function.

Where next? GYRO: see p. 107.

Adjust FailSafe (F/S) settings (p. 50).

$GMXVWLGOHXSFROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHIRUVDPHUDWHVRIFOLPEXSULJKWLQYHUWHG

See p. 101.

$GMXVW HOHYDWRUDLOHURQ UHVSRQVHWR ILW \RXU IO\LQJ VW\OH VHHD/R,EXP and END 

POINTSWASH AFR: p. 42, 39, 95.
110

GLOSSARY 

'&RPPRQQDPHIRUFHUWDLQW\SHVRIDHUREDWLFPDQHXYHUV$LUFUDIWÀ\LQJEHORZWKHPRGHO¶VVWDOOVSHHGVXFKDVWRUTXH

rolls. Helicopters: combining 2 or more maneuvers, such as rolling loop.

4.8V: 4.8 volt battery pack, made of 4 Ni-Cd 1.2V cells. See Accessories.

5-cell: 6.0 volt battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

6V (6Volt): battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

ACCELERATION: a delay mix which richens the engine mixture and then returns to normal to compensate for abrupt throttle 

changes. See THROTTLE-NEEDLE. ............................................................................................................................................ 65

Accessories: additional optional items which may be used with your 10CG. ..................................................................... 10

ACRO: model type designed for use with powered aircraft. Selected in the MODEL submenu under TYPE. ........................... 34 

ACRO vs GLID comparison. .................................................................................................................................................... 34

ACT. Active. Enables a feature to be utilized. Opposite of INH. Only visible in certain features.

Adjustable Function Rate: see SWASH AFR.

$GMXVWDEOH6HUYR7UDYHO$67DVSHFL¿FW\SHRIHQGSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW6HHEND POINT.

Adjustable Travel Limited (ATL): End point adjustment for low end only, for throttle channel. See ATL.

$GMXVWDEOH7UDYHO9ROXPH$79DQROGHUOHVVVSHFL¿FWHUPIRUHQGSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW6HHEND POINT.

ADVANCEPHQXV6SHFL¿FPHQXV IRUHDFKPRGHOW\SHZKLFKDOORZWKHPRGHOHUWRDFFHVVDQG SURJUDPWKH UDGLR¶VPRUH

advanced features.

AFR: Adjustable function rate. Used only in HELI model types with CCPM heads. See SWASH AFR.

AILE-2: second aileron servo assignment. See Twin aileron servos.

AILE1/2/3/4: Designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the aileron command. Ex: when using 

ailevators, the two elevator servos are also acting as ailerons 3 and 4 (unless you set their values to 0). See Twin aileron 

servos and Twin elevator servos.

AILE/RUDD (GLID): You can select a pre-programed mix which is used to mix the rudders with aileron operation or the 

DLOHURQVZLWKUXGGHURSHUDWLRQ$LOHURQWRUXGGHUPL[$,/(ĺ58''DXWRPDWLFDOO\FUHDWHVDFRRUGLQDWHGWXUQ5XGGHU

WRDLOHURQPL[ 58''ĺ$,/( XVHGWR FRXQWHUUDFW XQGHVLUDEOH UROO UROO FRXSOLQJWKDW KDSSHQV ZLWK UXGGHULQSXW

especially in knife-edge. ...................................................................................................................................................... 81

Aileron: surface that controls the roll of the model. Also called cyclic roll on a helicopter.

$LOHURQWRÀDSPL[LQJ0L[LQJ XVHGWRFUHDWH IXOOVSDQDLOHURQDFWLRQ1RWD SUHSURJUDPPHGPL[6HHProgrammable

mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.

Aileron-to-rudder mix: Mixing that automatically creates a “coordinated turn”. Not a pre-programmed mix. See 

Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one curve mix in HELIGLID.

Aileron Differential: Decreased down aileron travel when compared to up aileron travel. Minimizes “dragging” the low 

wing and creates more axial rolls. See Twin aileron servos. .............................................................................................. 51 

Ailevator: two elevators on separate channels, also capable of acting as additional ailerons. See Twin elevator servos.

AILEVATORS: (ACRO) Twin elevator servos plugged into separate channels, used to control elevator with the option to also 

act as ailerons in conjunction with the primary ailerons. ..................................................................................................... 56 

Airbrake-to-elevator mixing: (GLID) Applies up or down elevator when airbrakes are deployed, correcting for any pitch 

change from the added drag. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix.

Airbrake: (GLID/HDGLQJHGJHÀDSVRQJOLGHUVFRQWUROOHGE\CHANNEL 3 (NORMALLY THROTTLE) STICK.

AIRBRAKE: (ACRO&RPELQHVHOHYDWRUÀDSDQGRSWLRQDOO\VSRLOHUVWRVXGGHQO\VORZWKHPRGHOIRUVSRWODQGLQJV0D\EH
111

triggered by THROTTLE STICK POSITION. For similar glider programming, see BUTTERFLY. ...................................... 63 

$0$$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV1RQSUR¿WRUJDQL]DWLRQJRYHUQLQJPRGHODLUFUDIWÀLJKWLQWKH86...................... 5 

AST: Adjustable Servo Travel. See END POINT.

ATL: Adjustable Travel Limited. Standard type of trim used for throttle, where the trim is effective only in the idle portion 

of the THROTTLE STICK POSITION. Normal trims affect the entire travel of the servo (ex: elevator trims), but ATL

trims only the low end of the throttle movement, allowing throttle idle adjustments that donit over-drive the servo at full 

throttle. ................................................................................................................................................................................. 38

ATV: Older, less clear terminology for end point adjustment. See END POINT.

Autorotation: The ability of a helicopter to land safely without engine power, using the stored energy in the bladeis rotation 

WRSURGXFHOLIWIRUÀDULQJ

AUX-CH: Auxiliary channel setup. Used to assign which KNOBSSWITCHESSLIDERS control channels 5-10. Includes channels 

9-10 servo reverse. Also allows assignment of a channel to mixing only (assigned as NULL), with no primary control. ............... 46 

Backup battery: battery used to protect data storage in case of removal of master transmitter battery. In most Futaba radios, 

including the 10CG, EEPROM data storage is used, so no backup battery is used or needed. 

BACKUP ERROR: transmitter's hard-coded memory has been lost. Send for service immediately. ....................................... 24

Base-Loaded antenna: also called Whip antenna. Aftermarket equipment not approved by Futaba. 

Basic model setups: guidelines to setting up the most basic models of each type. ........................ ACRO 27 GLID 76 HELI 90 

BASICPHQXV6SHFL¿FPHQXVZLWKPRVWFRPPRQO\XVHGIHDWXUHVIRUHDFKPRGHOW\SH .............. ACRO 30 GLID 78 HELI 93 

Battery care and charging. (Charging the Ni-Cd batteries) ................................................................................................. 15 

Battery FailSafe: determines how the receiver indicates an airborne pack low-battery warning. Defaults: 56% throttle, 

requires throttle to idle to override. To adjust the warning point, set a THROTTLE STICK POSITION in F/S. .............. 50 

BEEP: tone emitted by transmitter to signify a variety of situations. See Error messages.

Binding: friction in a joint exceeding the movement of the linkage. Sticking or inability to continue movement. The servo 

FRQWLQXHVWRDWWHPSWWRPRYHWKHVXUIDFHEH\RQGLWVSRZHUFDSDELOLWLHVUDSLGO\GUDLQLQJEDWWHU\SRZHUDVLWFRQWLQXHVWR

struggle.

%UDNHÀDSPL[LQJGLID7KUHHPL[HVEUDNHÀDSWRHOHYDWRUWRDLOHURQDQGWRVSHHGÀDSVFRPSHQVDWHIRUXQZDQWHG

reaction to lowering the brake flap, 2) increase brake flap area by including the flaperons, and 3) add lift to increase 

maneuverability. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix.

Buddy Box: see Trainer box. 

BUTTERFLY: (GLID) [also called crow, AIRBRAKE(ACRO@$FWLYDWHV XS ÀDSHURQV DQG GRZQ ÀDSV IRU JOLGLQJ VSHHG FRQWURO

without spoilers or airbrakes. Note: More adjustable programming is available in ACRO, AIRBRAKE. ................................ 63 

CAMBER FLAP (GLIDDVVLJQVWKHSULPDU\ÀDSFRQWUROWRDOORZWULPPLQJLQÀLJKWRIWKHÀDSDFWLRQ7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORI

HDFKÀDSFDQEHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\$OVRWKHFHQWHUSRVLWLRQRIÀDSVHUYRFDQEHRIIVHW........................................... 86

CAMBER MIX (GLIDDGMXVWVWKHPL[LQJ UDWHRIFDPEHURSHUDWLRQZKLFKRSHUDWHVWKHZLQJFDPEHU DLOHURQVDQGÀDSVLQ

WKHQHJDWLYHDQGSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQV7KHDLOHURQÀDSDQGHOHYDWRUUDWHVFDQDOVREHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\DQGDWWLWXGH

changes caused by camber operation can be corrected. ....................................................................................................... 85

CAMPac2SWLRQDOH[WHQGHGGDWDVWRUDJHPRGXOH)XWDEDVWRFN'3....................................................... 10 

CCPM: Cyclic (pitch and roll) Collective Pitch Mixing. Multiple servos work in unison on the helicopter's head to create 

one or more of the control functions. Ex: Three servos set at 120 degrees operate the entire head. The two forward servos 

work together to rotate both the blade's pitch and the roll cyclic (aileron) in a HR3 head type. See MODEL TYPE, HELI.

CH5&6: setting in AILE-2 that allows the second aileron servo to be in channel 5. See Twin aileron servos.

CH6 or 7: default setting in AILE-2. Second aileron servo is in channel 6 or 7 depending on function used. See Twin aileron 
112

servos.

&KDQQHOVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQDQGGLUHFWLRQFRQWURO6HHAUX-CH. ...................................................................................... 46 

Channel delay: see THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO) and DELAY(HELI).

Charge: to increase the electrical energy, measured as voltage, available in a battery pack. See Battery care and charging.

Condition: (HELIVHSDUDWHÀLJKWVHWXSWKDWKDVVLJQL¿FDQWDGMXVWDELOLW\VHSDUDWHIURPWKHEDVLFPRGHOVHWXS6HHIDLEUP 1, 2, 

3 and THROTTLE HOLD.

Contact information, North American Service Center. .......................................................................................................... 3 

Copy model: see MODEL COPY.

Crow: see BUTTERFLY (GLID) and AIRBRAKE (ACRO).

Cursor: See SELECT BUTTONS.

Curve Mix: a mix that does not have the same reaction at all points along the master channel. See Programmable mix.

Cyclic: horizontal controls on a helicopter. Cyclic pitch is typically called elevator. Cyclic roll is typically called aileron.

'DWDUHVHWHUDVHDOOGDWDLQDVSHFL¿FPRGHO6HHRESET.

DELAY: (HELI) slows the servo’s reaction time when changing from one condition to another. Eases any “jumps” in transition 

from one pitch setting to another, etc. Also see THROTTLE DELAY, p. 59 (ACRO). ................................................................ 103

Delta peak charger: common name for a specialized charger designed and required to properly peak charge both NiMH 

and NiCd batteries, actually called a Zero Delta V Peak Charger. See Battery Care and Charging.

Dial: transmitter’s rotary control and button used in various ways during programming. .................................................. 11

Dial mix: mix that uses a knob or slider as the master control, moving the slave servo based upon the movement of the 

knob or slider. See Prog. mix.

Differential: uneven movement in each direction of a control surface. Usually used when discussing ailerons or when 

describing an undesirable unevenness in movement of other controls. See Twin aileron servos.

'LRGHDQHOHFWURQLFGHYLFHZKLFKRQO\DOORZVFXUUHQWWRÀRZRQHGLUHFWLRQ8VHGWRSURWHFWUDGLRDJDLQVWSRZHUVXUJHDQG

reversed polarity during charging. ....................................................................................................................................... 15

DIR-SW: switches that change between the four separate directions of snaps available. See SNAP ROLL.

Discharge: to deplete the electrical energy in a battery pack, usually to its lowest safe voltage, for storage or as a part of 

regular maintenance. See Battery care and charging.

DP16K: see CAMPac.

Dual aileron servos: (ACROGLID) a model using two servos on two separate channels to operate ailerons. May include 

ÀDSHURQDFWLRQRUDLOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDO6HHTwin aileron servos. ........................................................................................ 51 

Dual elevator servos: (ACROGLID) a model using two servos on two separate channels to operate elevators. Includes 

elevon, V-tail, ailevator. See Twin elevator servos. ............................................................................................................. 56 

Dual rates (D/R,EXPUHGXFHLQFUHDVHWKHVHUYRWUDYHOE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKRUE\VWLFNSRVLWLRQ8VHGWRPDNHPRGHOPRUH

FRPIRUWDEOHWR À\LQ GLIIHUHQWPDQHXYHUV &* VXSSRUWVWULSOH UDWHV E\ VLPSO\ DVVLJQLQJ GXDO UDWHVWRWKUHH SRVLWLRQ

switches. Includes exponential function, see EXP. ................................................................................................................ 42

Elapsed Time Counter reset: see TIMER. ............................................................................................................................... 45 

ELE1/2/3/4: designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the elevator command. Ex: when using 

elevon, the two wing servos are acting as elevators 1 and 2. See Twin elevator servos.

Elevator: surface which controls the model’s rate of climb or descent. Also called cyclic pitch on helicopters.

Elevator-to-airbrake mix: (GLID) used to allow the model to loop even tighter on elevator input by having airbrakes work with 

elevators. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one curve mix in GLID. 
113

(OHYDWRUWRÀDSPL[ ACROGLID8VHGWRDSSO\ÀDSVDORQJZLWKHOHYDWRUVWRLQFUHDVHOLIWDOORZLQJPRGHOHUWRÀ\DW

slower speeds, make tighter loops or turns, etc. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default 

setting of one mix in ACRO and GLID.

Elevator-to-pitch mix: (HELI) used to adjust pitch to counter the loss of angle of attack when elevator input is given. Not a 

pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of one mix in HELI.

ELEVONÀ\LQJZLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQZLWKWZRVHUYRVZRUNLQJWRJHWKHUWRFUHDWHERWKDLOHURQDQGHOHYDWRUDFWLRQ6HH7ZLQ

elevator servos. .................................................................................................................................................................... 56

Elevons: two surfaces, one on each wing, which work as both ailerons and elevators. See ELEVON.

END BUTTON: control button used during programming to return to previous menu or close menu altogether.

END POINT: often abbreviated EPA. Adjusts the total travel in each direction of proportional servos regardless of their 

control assignment. Ex: adjustment to AIL channel will adjust only the servo plugged into channel 1 even if being used 

DVRQHRIWZRÀDSHURQVRUHOHYRQV1RWH(QGSRLQWLVQRWDQDEVROXWHPL[LQJFDQVWLOOGULYHWKHVHUYR IDUWKHUWKDQWKLV

setting. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 39 

Engine cut: see THROTTLE-CUT.

EPA: see END POINT.

(UURUPHVVDJHVZDUQLQJVFDXWLRQVSURYLGHGE\WKHUDGLRZKHQSRWHQWLDOSUREOHPVPD\H[LVW ........................................ 24

Exponential (D/R,EXP): adjustment to the relationship of STICK MOVEMENT to servo movement, typically used to soften

overly sensitive models around center. ................................................................................................................................ 42

FASST®

: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology

FailSafe (F/S): sets servo positions when interference is encountered or signal is lost. Also includes Battery FailSafe 

settings. ................................................................................................................................................................................ 50 

FLAP1/2/3/4GHVLJQDWLRQIRUWKHLQGLYLGXDOVHUYRVWKDWDUHEHLQJFRPPDQGHGE\WKHÀDSFRPPDQGV([ZKHQDFWLQJDV

ÀDSHURQVWKHWZRDLOHURQVHUYRVDUHDLOHURQVDQGDQGDOVRÀDSVDQG XQOHVV\RXVHWWKHLUYDOXHVWRWKHQWKH\

PRYHRQO\DVDLOHURQQRPDWWHUZKDWÀDSFRPPDQGVDUHJLYHQ6HHTwin aileron servos and Twin elevator servos.

Flap-to-aileron mix: (ACROGLID) used to create full span flap reaction in flight. Not a pre-programmed mix. See 

Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.

Flap-to-elevator mix: (ACROGLIDXVHGWRFRXQWHUDFWXQZDQWHGFKDQJHVLQSLWFKZKHQÀDSVDUHGHSOR\HG1RWD

pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in ACRO and GLID.

FLAPERONRQHVHUYRRQHDFKDLOHURQSOXJJHGLQWRFKDQQHOVDQGZKLFKRSHUDWHERWKDVDLOHURQVDQGDVÀDSV6HHTwin 

aileron servos. ...................................................................................................................................................................... 51 

FLAP-TRIM$GMXVWPHQW RI FHQWUDO SRVLWLRQ RI ÀDSHURQV GHIDXOW DVVLJQHGWR&+$11(/ KNOB. May also be used as 

SULPDU\RURQO\FRQWURORIÀDSHURQVDFWLQJDVÀDSVRURWKHUPL[HVPD\EHVHWXS6HHTwin aileron servos. .................. 53 

Fuel mixture control: (ACROHELI) see THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

FUNC: function mode of TRAINER, allows student radio to use the computer programming for that channel in the master 

UDGLR ([ DOORZV D VWXGHQW ZLWK D FKDQQHOWUDQVPLWWHUWR À\ DQ VHUYR DHUREDWLF SODQH RU D VHUYR KHOLFRSWHU 6HH

TRAINER.

Gain: the responsiveness or amount of control given the gyro. On a high gain, the gyro is very active and overrides nearly 

all other actions. Too high a gain may result in “wagging” at the surface as the gyro over-corrects repeatedly in each 

direction. See GYRO SENS.

Gear doors: covers for retractable landing gear, may be operated separately from landing gear on some models. ............ 74

GLID: model type, glider. ...................................................................................................................................................... 75

Governor: electronic device that reads the speed at which the head is spinning, and adjusts the throttle servo to maintain 
114

the desired speed. 

GOVERNOR: (HELI) programming which eases the setup of the GV-1 governor. ................................................................. 106

*9SDUWQXPEHUQDPHIRU)XWDED
VHOHFWURQLFJRYHUQRU6HHGyros and Governors and GOVERNOR for details. 

Gyro, gyroscope: equipment that senses change in direction and provides input to compensate for that change. For 

description of aircraft use, see p. 66. For description of types, and helicopter use, see GYRO SENS.

GYRO SENS (ACROHELI): gyro sensitivity programming designed to ease the setup and use of gyroscopes on model 

airplanes and helicopters. Manual pages include extensive descriptions of gyro types. ............................................. 73, 106

Gyros and Governors ......................................................................................................................................................... 106

+HDGLQJKROGJ\URJ\URWKDWVSHFL¿FDOO\PHDVXUHVWKHXQZDQWHGGHÀHFWLRQDQJOHDQGFRPSHQVDWHVXQWLODFRUUHVSRQGLQJ

angle has been returned. See Gyros and Governors.

HELI: model type, rotary wing. See MODEL TYPE.

+HOLFRSWHUUDGLRWUDQVPLWWHUWKDWLQFOXGHVKHOLFRSWHUIULHQGO\VZLWFKDQGFRQWUROOD\RXWDQGVXI¿FLHQWSURJUDPPLQJWRDW

least support a 5-channel helicopter. The 10CAG and 10CHG radios both contain all needed programming. The 10CHG 

has a more heli-friendly layout (through switch positioning and no ratchet on throttle for easier hovering)

HI/LO-PIT (HELIPD\EHXVHGWRDGMXVWSLWFKFXUYHVKLJKDQGORZVLGHLQÀLJKW ............................................................. 105

High Rate: See D/R,EXP.

Hover: to maintain a stationary position relative to a point on the ground.

HOVERING PITCH: see Hovering setups.

HOVERING THROTTLE: see Hovering setups.

+RYHULQJVHWXSVLQÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQWVWRSLWFKDQGWKURWWOHFXUYHVDURXQGFHQWHUTHROTTLE STICK position (the ideal 

hovering point). .................................................................................................................................................................. 104 

Idle management: varying settings and control of the modelis idle. Ex: using IDLE-DOWN to lower engine's idle point for 

landings and certain maneuvers; using THR-CUT function to safely and accurately shut the engine off as needed without 

requiring constant adjustment of throttle trims. ................................................................................................................... 40 

IDLE-DOWN: offset mix that slows the engineis idle point (decreasing the amount of travel of the throttle servo when at low 

THROTTLE STICK POSITION). Typically used to keep the model sitting still on the runway prior to take off, for slow 

aerobatic maneuvers such as spins, and for landings. See Idle management. ..................................................................... 40 

IDLE-UPVHSDUDWHFRQGLWLRQFUHDWHGWRDOORZLQYHUWHGDQGRWKHUW\SHVRIÀLJKWZLWKDKHOLFRSWHUQRWHDVLO\DFKLHYHGLQWKH

normal condition. Note: the idle-ups are activated by activating their throttle curves. Also note that OFFSET is available to 

create separate trims within each condition. ...................................................................................................................... 101 

,QÀLJKWQHHGOHFRQWUROVHHTHROTTLE-NEEDLE.

INHPDNHVDIHDWXUHLQDFWLYHXQDEOHWREHXVHG:KHQDIXQFWLRQLVLQKLELWHGLWFDQQRWEHXVHGHYHQLIWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFK

LV217XUQVRIIIXQFWLRQDOLW\ZLWKRXWORVLQJDQ\VHWWLQJV2QO\YLVLEOHLQVSHFL¿FIHDWXUHV

Inhibit: see INH.

Installation: radio installation and setup. ............................................................................................................................. 18

,QYHUWHGWRÀ\DPRGHOXSVLGHGRZQ

Kill switch: (1) throttle cut switch to close carburetor (see THR-CUT, p. 40). (2) gasoline ignition engine kill switch which 

removes spark to the plugs to stop the engine. .................................................................................................................... 74
115

Launch setting: (GLID) see START-OFS.

Linear Mix: a mix that maintains the same relationship of master to slave throughout the whole range. Ex: a mix from 

RQHÀDSVHUYRWRDQRWKHUÀDSVHUYRDWFDXVHVWKHQGVHUYRWRIROORZWKH¿UVWVHUYR¶VPRYHPHQWH[DFWO\WKURXJKDOO

points of travel. See Programmable mix.

LINK: mixing function that allows multiple mixes to work in conjunction with one another. See Programmable mix.

Linear: linear, directly proportional. See AIRBRAKE.

LOGIC SW: can be assigned to the following functions: THR-CUT, IDLE DOWN, AUX-CH, TIMER, PROG. MIX, AIRBRAKE, ELEVFLAP, and AILE-FLAP functions. The logic switch can activate functions by combining two switches. The two types of logic, 

either AND or OR, can be selected. ..................................................................................................................................... 38

LOW BATTERYZDUQLQJWUDQVPLWWHU¶VEDWWHU\LVEHORZWKHVDIHÀLJKWYROWDJH5HFKDUJHLPPHGLDWHO\6HHError messages.

Low rate: see D/R, EXP.

MANUAL: controlled by a switch. Ex: see AIRBRAKE.

Master: the primary control. See Programmable mix.

Mechanical gyro: uses a mechanical gyroscope (like a child’s toy gyro) to sense change of angle. See Gyros and 

Governors.

MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE: warning to indicate that the CAMPac installed in the port is not yet formatted or formatted for 

a different model of transmitter. Pressing the Dial initializes the CAMPac, deleting any existing data and formatting the 

CAMPac for use in the 10CG. See Error codes.

Mix, mixing rate, mix offset, mix links: See Programmable mix.

MIXER ALERTZDUQLQJQRWL¿HVXVHUWKDWDPL[LVDFWLYDWHGZKLFKLVQRWFRQVLGHUHGGHVLUDEOHIRUHQJLQHVWDUWXS6HHError

messages.

0RGHGH¿QLWLRQRIZKLFKFKDQQHOVDUHDVVLJQHGWRZKLFKSTICK movements. Most 10CG radios shipped in the US are 

Mode 2, with elevator and aileron on the right STICK. To change mode, please visit www.futaba-rc.com. 

MODE BUTTON: control button on radio’s face used in various parts of programming. ................................................. 11 

MODEL COPY: used to duplicate the settings of one model already in memory into a second model memory. Often used to 

set up two similar models, or make a copy of a working model to experiment with new setups. Also used to copy models 

WRIURPWKHCAMpac data storage unit. ............................................................................................................................... 31 

MODEL NAME: gives each model memory an 8-character name for easy recognition. In MODEL submenu. .......................... 32

MODEL RESET: restore all data in a single model memory to defaults, including name and model type. See RESET.

MODEL SELECTFKRRVHWKHPRGHOPHPRU\\RXZLVKWRPRGLI\RUÀ\,QMODEL submenu. ................................................ 30 

MODEL SELECTION ERROR: the memory last loaded in the transmitter is not currently available (usually because it is on a 

CAMPac not currently in the transmitter). See Error messages.

MODEL TYPEVHOHFWWKHW\SHRIPRGHOWKHDLUFUDIWLVLQFOXGLQJDLUSODQHWZRJOLGHUW\SHVDQG¿YHKHOLW\SHV ................. 34 

MODUL: modulation, means of transmitting data (2.4G-7CH, 2.4G-10CH). In PARAMETER submenu. ..................................... 35 

MOTOR CUT (GLID SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\WR VWRSWKHPRWRU E\ ÀLSSLQJ D VZLWFK UHJDUGOHVV RIWKH$,5%5$.( 67,&.

position. ................................................................................................................................................................................ 79

Name: see MODEL NAME.

Neckstrap: optional strap to suspend transmitter during use. Futaba stock # FTA8. See Accessories.

Ni-Cd: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery. Typically used to power transmitter and receiver. See Battery care and 

charging.

NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable battery. Newer battery technology than Ni-Cd. Longer run times but more 
116

VSHFL¿FSHDNFKDUJLQJUHTXLUHPHQWV>5HTXLUHD]HURGHOWDSHDNFKDUJHUODEHOHGVSHFL¿FDOO\IRUXVHZLWK1L0+EDWWHULHV@

NORMAL: trainer mode that does not give student radio the computer programming features of the master radio. See 

Trainer.

NT8S: standard transmitter battery pack. See Accessories.

NULL: not assigned or never changed. Ex: a mix which has a null switch assignment is always active, and can never be 

FKDQJHGLQÀLJKWWXUQHGRIIQRPDWWHUZKLFKVZLWFKLVPRYHG

OFFSET: (HELI) separate trim settings available to each idle-up (using CONDITION) setting, or assigned to separate switches 

from the condition switches. When offset is ON, movement of the trim levers adjusts the OFFSET, not the normal condition's 

trims. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 102

OFFSETsDGGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOHVSHFLI¿FDOO\IRUVDLOSODQHV ......................................................................... 84

Offset mix: mix that independently moves the slave servo a set percentage of its total throw, not in relation to any master. 

See Programmable mix.

PA2: Pilot Assist. Optional onboard device that uses optical sensors to correct modelis orientation to upright.

PARAMETERVXEPHQXVHWVVSHFL¿FSDUDPHWHUV,QFOXGHVUHVHWW\SHPRGXODWLRQVHFRQGDLOHURQVHUYRVHWXSDQGATL. ... 33 

Peak Charger: charger that automatically stops charging when the battery is fully charged (commonly called "peaked"). 

See Battery care and charging.

Piezo gyro: gyro that uses a piezo crystal to sense angular changes. See Gyros and Governors.

Pitch-to-rudder mix: see REVO.

PITCH CURVE: (HELI FXUYHWKDW VHWVWKH UHVSRQVH RIWKH FROOHFWLYH SLWFK VHUYRVWRPRYHPHQW RIWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYH

STICK,QGHSHQGHQWO\DGMXVWDEOHLQWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWPRGHRQHIRUHDFKRIWKHWKUHHLGOHXSVDQGRQHIRUWKURWWOHKROG

Adjusted to provide ideal blade response for various types of maneuvers being performed. For simplicity, the normal 

condition's curve may be set in the BASICPHQX$OO¿YHFXUYHVDUHDOVRDGMXVWDEOHLQWKHADVANCE menu. ..................... 99 

PPM: Pulse Position Modulation. Type of signal transmission. 

Programmable mix: used to cause specific servo responses to specific inputs separate from the basic control setups. 

,QFOXGHVH[WHQVLYHGH¿QLWLRQVRIW\SHVDQGH[DPSOHV ........................................................................................................ 68 

5DQJHFKHFNRUWHVWWRWHVWWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVFRQWURORYHUWKHPRGHODWDVSHFL¿FGLVWDQFHDVDSUHFDXWLRQLQFKHFNLQJLWV

SURSHURSHUDWLRQSULRUWRÀLJKW............................................................................................................................................ 18 

Rate: amount of control given. Ex: see Programmable mix.

RESET: to delete all data in the existing model only. User CANNOT erase all data in the radio. Only service center can do 

so. Part of PARAMETER submenu. ......................................................................................................................................... 33 

5HWUDFWDEOHODQGLQJJHDUODQGLQJJHDUWKDWLVEURXJKWXSLQWRWKHPRGHOGXULQJÀLJKW ..................................................... 74 

REVERSE: servo reversing. Used to reverse the direction of a servo to ease installation and set up. .................................... 38 

Rudder-to-aileron mix: (ACROGLID) used to counteract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder 

input, especially in knife-edge. Gives proper aileron input to counteract roll coupling when rudder is applied. Not a 

pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one linear and one curve mix in ACRO

and GLID.

Rudder-to-elevator mix: used to counteract undesirable pitch (pitch coupling) with rudder input, especially in knife edge 

ÀLJKW1RWDSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[6HHProgrammable mix. This is the default programming for one curve mix in ACRO.

Rudder-to-throttle mix: (HELI) adds throttle to counter the added load from increasing pitch of the tail blades, maintaining 

a constant head-speed with rudder. (This is a minor effect and is not critical in most helicopters.) Not a pre-programmed 

mix. See Programmable mix.
117

Rx: receiver.

SAFE MODE: feature in snap roll programming that does not allow a snap roll if landing gear is lowered. See Snap roll.

Sailplane: glider, non-powered model aircraft type. See GLIDMODEL TYPE.

Select a model: see MODEL SELECT.

Service Center. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3

SERVOEDUJUDSKGLVSOD\RQVFUHHQWRVKRZ UHDOWLPHPRYHPHQWFRPPDQGVVHQWWRVHUYRVE\WUDQVPLWWHULQ UHVSRQVHWR

user movements. Also includes a servo test feature. ............................................................................................................ 49 

Servo reversing: see REVERSE.

Servo Slow: see Channel delay.

Servo testing, servo display: See SERVO.

SET: to accept. Usually done by pressing and holding the dial when instructed.

Slave: channel that moves in response to the command of the master. See Programmable mix.

Slaving servos: see programmable mix. ............................................................................................................................. 68

Slider assignability: sliders on side of radio, known as VR(D) and VR(E) in programming, may be assigned to control 

channels 5-8 in AUX-CH, used as the primary control of a mix in programmable mixes, etc.

Slow: see Channel delay.

Smoke system: injects a specialized smoke oil into the hot exhaust to create air-show like smoke trails. ......................... 74 

SNAP ROLL: (ACROFRPELQHV UXGGHUHOHYDWRUDQGDLOHURQPRYHPHQWWRFDXVHWKHDLUFUDIWWRVQDSRUVSLQDWWKHÀLSRID

switch. 10CG offers four separate snaps with one or two switches used for selection. ...................................................... 59 

6SHHG)ODSVPDLQÀDSVRQD¿YHVHUYRJOLGHU

SPOILER MIX (GLIDPRYHVWKHVSRLOHUVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFKDQGLVXVHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWV$QGSPOILER

MIX works linking with BUTTERFLY function. ....................................................................................................................... 83

START DELAY (GLID 1A+1F only): automatically switch the offset trims (OFFSET) from the START condition's trims to the 

normal cndition's trims after proceeding the delay time (max.10sec.) which is preset when activating the START condition. 

It is convenient for hand launch glider. ................................................................................................................................ 85

Stick adjustments: change stick tension and height. ............................................................................................................ 16 

STk-THR: assigned to THROTTLE STICK. See AIRBRAKE for example. 

SUB-TRIMXVHGWR¿QHWXQHWKHFHQWHURUQHXWUDOSRLQWRIHDFKVHUYR$OORZVIXOOWULPIXQFWLRQIURPWKHWULPVOLGHUVIRU

ÀLJKWWULPPLQJ .................................................................................................................................................................... 49 

SWASH AFR: (HELI, CCPM types only) adjustment of the travel of all servos involved in the particular controlis movement 

only during the movement of that control. Ex: reverse the direction of movement of collective pitch while not affecting the 

direction of movement of either cyclic control. ................................................................................................................... 95 

Swashplate type: (HELI3DUWRIWKHPRGHOW\SHVHOHFWLRQSURFHVV6HOHFWVVSHFL¿FKHOLVZDVKSODWHJHRPHWU\VXFKDVRQHRI

four available types of "CCPM." ......................................................................................................................................... 95 

SWASH-RING (HELIOLPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRZLWKLQD¿[HGUDQJH .......................................................................... 96 

SWASH-THR (HELI): is corrected the tendency of the model to change altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, elevator, 

and other controls. ................................................................................................................................................................ 85 

Switch programmability: MOST features are reassignable to a variety of switches, including simply moving an auxiliary 

FRQWUROVXFKDVÀDSVIURPWKHVWRFNGLDOWRDVZLWFKRURWKHUORFDWLRQ6HHAUX-CH.
118

7HFKQLFDO6SHFL¿FDWLRQV........................................................................................................................................................ 9 

7KHUPDOKXQWLQJVHWXSXVLQJVSHFL¿FSURJUDPPLQJVHWXSVWRKDYHWKHPRGHOUHVSRQGQRWLFHDEO\WRWKHOLIWRIDWKHUPDO

Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix.

THR-DELAY: (ACRO) throttle delay, slows engine servo response to imitate the spool-up action of a turbine engine. May also 

be used creatively to create a delayed servo on a different function (see www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.) ............... 66 

THR-REV: reverses the throttle trim function to the top of the THROTTLE STICK. ........................................................... 38

THROTTLE-NEEDLE: (ACROHELI) curve mix that adjusts a second servo, controlling the engine’s mixture, to get optimum 

RPM and performance from the engine at all settings. ........................................................................................................ 65 

Throttle-to-rudder mix: used to compensate with rudder when throttle is applied on take off. Not a pre-programmed mix. 

See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of a mix in ACRO and GLID.

THROTTLE CURVE: (HELI) adjusts how the servo responds to the THROTTLE STICK position along a 5 point curve. 

Separate curves available for each idle-up and normal. For simplicity, normal curve may be edited from BASIC menu. All 

curves may be edited together in the ADVANCE menu. Activating an idle-up’s throttle curve is what activates that idle-up. 

.86,89

Throttle cut or throttle kill: THR-CUT. (ACROHELI) Offset mix which closes the throttle servo to a set position when the 

assigned switch is moved to shut the engine off without having to alter trim settings. ....................................................... 40 

THROTTLE HOLD: (HELI) makes the throttle servo non-responsive to THROTTLE STICK position, and moves the throttle to 

idle. Used to practice autorotations. NOTE: THR-HOLD must be activated, then the default pitch curve adjusted properly. 

............................................................................................................................................................................................. 99

THROTTLE MIX (HELI FDQ EH VHW IRU HDFK ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ DQGLV XVHGWR FRUUHFWWKHWHQGHQF\ RIWKHPRGHOWR FKDQJH

altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, elevator, and rudder controls. .......................................................................... 96 

Throttle trim adjustment: see ATL to change throttle trim from “idle only” to full trim control like all other channels. See 

THR-REV to reverse THROTTLE STICK completely, including moving trim to the top of the THROTTLE STICK. See 

also Idle management for details on idle down and throttle cut functions.

TIMERDGMXVWWKHWLPHUIXQFWLRQVXVHGWRNHHSWUDFNRIÀLJKWWLPHRQDWDQNRIIXHOHWF7KH3WULJJHU ́WRWXUQWLPHUVRQRII

may be programmed. ........................................................................................................................................................... 45 

TRAINER: software that allows two radios to be connected via trainer cord, giving student control of all or some of the 

FKDQQHOVRIWKHDLUFUDIWDWWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFKFUNC trainer mode allows student to use mixing in the master transmitter, for 

H[DPSOHGXDOUDWHVH[SRQHQWLDOÀ\DFKDQQHOKHOLFRSWHUZLWKDFKDQQHOEXGG\ER[HWF........................................... 47 

Trainer box: stripped-down radio system which does not have the ability to transmit, is used only as a student’s radio when 

instructing while using a trainer cord and the trainer programming.

7UDLQHUFRUGFRUGXVHGWRFRQQHFWWZRFRPSDWLEOHUDGLRVWRXVHIRUÀLJKWLQVWUXFWLRQ6HHAccessories.

TRIM menu: adjusts rate at which the trim responds to movement of the trim sliders. Also has a reset function to reset the 

model’s electronic trims to zero. .......................................................................................................................................... 48 

TRIM OFFSET: (HELI) sets an offset or adjustment of trim when switching between conditions. See OFFSET.

TRIM option in mixes: ability to adjust the slave servo’s center when the master servo’s center is adjusted using the trim 

VOLGHUVIRUH[DPSOHZKHQXVLQJWZRVHSDUDWHÀDSVHUYRV6HHProgrammable mix. ........................................................ 61

7ULSOHUDWHUGFRQWUROWUDYHOVHWWLQJDYDLODEOHLQÀLJKW6HH D/R,EXP.

7ZLQDLOHURQVHUYRVXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVHUYRVRQVHSDUDWHFKDQQHOVWRFRQWURODLOHURQDFWLRQ,QFOXGHVÀDSHURQDLOHURQ

differential, and elevon. ....................................................................................................................................................... 51 

Twin elevator servos: use of two or more servos on separate channels to control the elevator of a model. Includes elevon, 

ailevator, V-tail. .................................................................................................................................................................... 58

Tx: transmitter.
119

Voltmeter, voltage reading: displays transmitter voltage on home screen. .......................................................................... 23

VR(A-E): variable rate controls. Knobs and sliders on the radio. See switch assignment chart for default assignments.

VR(A-C) are knobs; VR(D-E) are sliders on the case sides.

V-tail model Mix: (ACROGLID) programming used to control a V-tail model’s tail surfaces, with two servos operating two 

control surfaces as both rudder and elevator. See Twin elevator servos.

Warning messages: cautions provided by the radio when certain potential problems exist. See Error messages.

Warranty information. ............................................................................................................................................................ 3

Website: www.futaba-rc.com. Internet location of extensive technical information Futaba products. ................................. 3